Mitutoyo Caller ID Box LSM 6200 User Manual
No.99MBC095A  
SERIES No.544  
LSM-6200  
Laser Scan  
Micrometer  
(Display Unit)  
User's Manual  
Read this User’s Manual thoroughly  
before operating the instrument. After reading,  
retain it close at hand for future reference.  
CONVENTIONS USED IN USER'S MANUAL  
On Various Types of Notes  
The following types of notes are provided to help the operator obtain reliable measurement data  
through correct instrument operation.  
IMPORTANT • An important note is a type of note that provides information essential to the completion  
of a task. You cannot disregard this note to complete the task.  
• An important note is a type of precaution, which if neglected could result in a loss of  
data, decreased accuracy or instrument malfunction/failure.  
NOTE A note emphasizes or supplements important points of the main text. A note supplies infor-  
mation that may only apply in special cases (e.g.. Memory limitations, equipment configura-  
tions, or details that apply to specific versions of a program).  
TIP A tip is a type of note that helps the user apply the techniques and procedures described in  
the text to their specific needs.  
It also provides reference information associated with the topic being discussed.  
Mitutoyo assumes no liability to any party for any loss or damage, direct or indirect,  
caused by use of this instrument not conforming to this manual.  
Information in this document is subject to change without notice.  
© Copyright Mitutoyo Corporation2005. All rights reserved.  
NOTES FOR EXPORTING  
Before exporting this product confirm the final purpose of use at the export destination to  
prevent the product from being used for developing weapons of mass destruction or military  
affairs. In the case of export to the U.S., this product requires an application for prior  
approval of CDRH (Center for Devices and Radiological Health) in FDA (Food and Drug  
Administration). For detailed information consult a Mitutoyo sales office. Also, if this  
product is exported with it incorporated in equipment, the final product requires an applica-  
tion for FDA approval. If this is the case, note that the client must file an application for  
approval.  
ii  
No. 99MBC095A  
PRECAUTIONS  
1. Safety Precautions  
The Measuring Unit connected to the Display Unit uses a very low power laser.  
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified  
herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.  
1) An applicable laser product class of the IEC standard: a Class 2 laser product uses a  
visible laser (maximum power: 1.3 mW for scanning; laser device: semiconductor laser;  
wavelength: 650 nm).  
2) Do not look directly into the laser beam. (Even if it seems that no light is being emitted  
from the emission window, do not look into it.)  
3) If measuring flat objects with mirror finishes, avoid looking at the reflection on the  
surface.  
4) Close the beam shutter when the instrument is not in use.  
5) Do not remove the laser class identification labels attached to the Measuring Unit.  
6) Before using this unit, carefully read the “Measuring Unit Specifications” and “Precau-  
tions on Use of Laser” sections provided in the manual supplied with the Measuring  
Unit.  
2. Before making the connection between the Measuring Unit and the Display Unit, turn off the  
power. If an optional device is to be connected to this system, make sure that the optional  
device is also turned off.  
3. Firmly tighten the screws of the cable connectors and interfaces to ensure shielding.  
4. Do not touch the terminals of the connectors, otherwise contact may be poor.  
5. Positively ground the Display Unit.  
6. An error display may appear during operation. However, it may not always indicate a fault. If  
an error display appears, consult the “Maintenance and Inspection” section.  
7. Unplug the power cord when a system failure is encountered.  
Do not open the covers provided on the emission unit and reception unit.  
iii  
No. 99MBC095A  
INSTALLING CONDITIONS  
The Mitutoyo Laser Scan Micrometer LSM-6100 series is both a precision optical instrument  
and a precision electronic instrument, and this unit is the instrument suitable for indoor use as  
well. Therefore, it must be carefully installed and the following conditions must be taken into  
consideration to attain the highest possible accuracy.  
1. Vibration  
Install this unit if possible in a place where it will not be subject to vibration. If this unit is  
used for a long period of time in an environment where there are significant vibrations, the  
precision parts in this unit may be affected, resulting in the deterioration of measuring  
accuracy.  
If this unit has to be used in an environment where vibration is significant, measures such as  
the laying of a vibration damping rubber pad under the unit must be applied to reduce the  
effect of vibration.  
2. Dust  
Dust and airborne particles at the installation site adversely affect optical parts including the  
protective glass and electronic parts of the Measuring Unit. Place this unit in a place with as  
little dust and as few airborne particles as possible.  
3. Direct sunlight  
If this unit is subjected to direct sunlight, the heat may deform this unit and affect the  
measuring accuracy.  
If this unit must be placed by a window where it will be subjected to direct sunlight, protect  
the unit by shading it.  
4. Draft from air-conditioning equipment  
If the measuring area is subject to such as warm or cold draft from any air-conditioning  
equipment, the laser beam may be artificially refracted due to the unevenness of ambient air  
concentration, affecting the measurement accuracy.  
If this is the case, block the draft in the mid-way to the measuring area by such as a curtain, etc.  
5. Ambient temperature and humidity  
This unit must be operated in an environment where the temperature is between 0 and 40˚C  
and the humidity is between 35 and 85% RH. Avoid installing this unit where there is  
significant temperature or humidity change.  
Significant temperature and humidity changes may reduce measuring accuracy.  
WARRANTY  
In the event that the Mitutoyo Laser Scan Micrometer (LSM) should prove defective in  
workmanship or material, within one year from the date of original purchase for use, it will  
be repaired or replaced, at our option, free of charge upon its prepaid return to us.  
If the unit fails or is damaged because of the following causes it will be subject to a repair  
change, even if it is still under warranty.  
1. Failure or damage due to inappropriate handling or unauthorized modification.  
2. Failure or damage due to transport, droppage, or relocation of the machine after  
purchase.  
3. Failure or damage due to fire, salt, gas, abnormal voltage, or natural catastrophe.  
This warranty is effective only where the machine is properly installed and operated follow-  
ing this manual.  
iv  
No. 99MBC095A  
CONTENTS  
CONVENTIONS USED IN USER'S MANUAL ................................................................. i  
NOTES FOR EXPORTING ...............................................................................................ii  
PRECAUTIONS ...............................................................................................................iii  
INSTALLING CONDITIONS ........................................................................................... iv  
WARRANTY.................................................................................................................... iv  
1. INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................... 1-1  
1.1 Outline ........................................................................................................... 1-1  
1.2 Foreword ....................................................................................................... 1-1  
1.2.1 Measuring units available ................................................................. 1-1  
1.2.2 Using the Measuring Unit separately ............................................... 1-1  
1.3 Nomenclature ................................................................................................ 1-2  
1.3.1 Display Unit....................................................................................... 1-2  
1.3.2 Measuring Unit.................................................................................. 1-4  
2. SETUP .................................................................................................................. 2-1  
2.1 Unpacking and Acceptance Check............................................................... 2-1  
2.2 Connecting the Cables ................................................................................. 2-1  
2.3 Preliminary Checks ....................................................................................... 2-5  
2.4 Initializing the LSM-6200 Display Unit .......................................................... 2-6  
3. DISPLAYS AND KEY OPERATIONS .................................................................. 3-1  
3.1 Outline of the Operation Modes ................................................................... 3-1  
3.1.1 Measurement Principle ..................................................................... 3-1  
3.1.1.1 Overview ................................................................................. 3-1  
3.1.1.2 Setting the segment ............................................................... 3-3  
3.1.1.3 Measurement interval (measurement time) ........................... 3-4  
3.1.2 Outline of the Operation Modes ....................................................... 3-5  
3.1.2.1 Basic setup mode ................................................................... 3-6  
3.1.2.2 Calibration mode .................................................................... 3-6  
3.1.2.3 Measuring condition setup mode ........................................... 3-6  
3.1.2.4 Other setup mode................................................................... 3-6  
3.1.2.5 Statistic display mode............................................................. 3-6  
3.1.2.6 Measurement mode................................................................ 3-7  
3.2 Techniques and Terminology of Setup Functions ........................................ 3-9  
3.2.1 Program ............................................................................................ 3-9  
3.2.2 Basic setup ..................................................................................... 3-10  
3.2.3 Function setup ................................................................................ 3-11  
3.2.4 Setups according to the property of each workpiece..................... 3-11  
3.2.4.1 Transparent object (Workpiece that transmits light) ............ 3-11  
3.2.4.2 Ultra-fine wire measurement ................................................ 3-14  
3.2.5 Measurement of an odd-numbered-edge cutting tool .................... 3-16  
3.2.6 Measurement with two Measuring Units (dual-unit measurement) ... 3-17  
3.2.6.1 DW type ................................................................................ 3-18  
3.2.6.2 DXY type .............................................................................. 3-19  
3.2.6.3 DF type ................................................................................. 3-20  
3.2.7 Latch (holding) of the displayed value ........................................... 3-22  
3.2.8 Automatic measurement with an edge specification ...................... 3-23  
3.2.9 GO/NG judgment ............................................................................ 3-24  
3.2.10 Abnormal data elimination .............................................................. 3-26  
3.2.11 Preset/Zero-set ............................................................................... 3-27  
v
No. 99MBC095A  
3.2.12 Mastering ........................................................................................ 3-27  
3.2.13 Reference value.............................................................................. 3-28  
3.2.14 Data output conditions .................................................................... 3-28  
3.2.15 Automatic workpiece detection <OD detection method,  
Position detection method> ............................................................ 3-29  
3.2.16 Group judgment .............................................................................. 3-31  
3.2.17 Recording the amount of light ........................................................ 3-32  
3.3 Outline of the Display Contents .................................................................. 3-33  
3.3.1 Display unit ..................................................................................... 3-33  
3.3.2 Data display unit ............................................................................. 3-33  
3.4 Outline of Key Operations .......................................................................... 3-35  
3.4.1 Description of key functions ........................................................... 3-37  
3.4.2 Example key operations ................................................................. 3-41  
4. SETTING UP THE MEASURING CONDITIONS ................................................. 4-1  
4.1 Basic Setup ................................................................................................... 4-1  
4.1.1 Outline of the basic setup procedure ............................................... 4-2  
4.1.2 Description of each mode................................................................. 4-4  
4.1.2.1 Selecting and setting the function in the B0 mode ................ 4-5  
a. Setting the resolution (Guidance: RES) ............................ 4-5  
b. Setting the number of blank-out digits (Guidance: BLN) .. 4-6  
c. Putting a comma after the thousandths digit  
(Guidance: (,)) ................................................................... 4-6  
d. Setting the buzzer function (Guidance: BUZZER) ............ 4-7  
e. Setting the display latch timer (Guidance: LATCH) ........... 4-7  
4.1.2.2 Selecting and setting the function in the B1 mode ................ 4-8  
a. Setting the output function in the ready state  
(Guidance: D.OUT)............................................................ 4-8  
b. Setting the analog output voltage if Err-0 occurs  
(Guidance: ERR-0 V) ........................................................ 4-8  
c. Selecting the display message if Err-0 occurs  
(Guidance: ERR-0 D) ........................................................ 4-8  
d. Selecting the display message at the start of measurement  
(Guidance: RUN D) ........................................................... 4-9  
e. Selecting the averaging method (Guidance: AVG.M)....... 4-9  
f. Setting the GO/NG judgment method  
(Guidance: JDG.M)............................................................ 4-9  
g. Setting whether the target value is copied to the reference  
value (Guidance: COPY)................................................. 4-10  
4.1.2.3 Selecting and setting the function in the B2 mode .............. 4-11  
a. Setting the workpiece type (Guidance: WORK.P) .......... 4-11  
b. Setting whether to perform ultra-fine wire measurement  
(Guidance: FINE)............................................................. 4-11  
c. Setting the simultaneous measurement  
(Guidance: PROG) .......................................................... 4-12  
d. Setting the dual-unit measurement (Guidance: TYPE)... 4-12  
e. Setting the DXY-type calculation (Guidance: CALC)...... 4-13  
f. Selecting the method of specifying segments  
(Guidance: SEG) ............................................................. 4-13  
4.1.2.4 Selecting and setting the function in the B3 mode .............. 4-14  
a. Setting the abnormal value elimination function  
(Guidance: ADE) ............................................................. 4-14  
vi  
No. 99MBC095A  
b. Setting the automatic workpiece detecting function  
(Guidance: AWDT) .......................................................... 4-14  
c. Setting the number of scans (Guidance: SCAN) ............ 4-15  
d. Setting the group judgment (Guidance: GTJ) ................. 4-15  
e. Setting the group judgement output (Guidance: GTJ D)... 4-15  
f. Setting the odd-numbered-edge cutting tool measurement  
function (Guidance : TOOL) ............................................ 4-16  
4.1.2.5 Selecting and setting the function in the B4 mode .............. 4-17  
a. Setting the use of RS-232C port  
(Guidance: RE-232C) ...................................................... 4-17  
b. Setting the RS-232C communication baud rate  
(Guidance: BAUD)........................................................... 4-17  
c. Setting the RS-232C communication data bits  
(Guidance: LENGTH) ...................................................... 4-17  
d. Setting the RS-232C communication parity bit  
(Guidance: PARITY)........................................................ 4-18  
e. Setting the delimiter for communication  
(Guidance DELIMT)......................................................... 4-18  
f. Setting the RS-232C line control  
(Guidance: CONTRL) ...................................................... 4-18  
4.1.2.6 Selecting and setting the function in the B5 mode .............. 4-19  
a. Setting the RUN input function from the I/O interface  
(Guidance: RUN) ............................................................. 4-19  
b. Setting the PSET input function from the I/O interface  
(Guidance: PSET) ........................................................... 4-19  
c. Setting the GO output function from the I/O interface  
(Guidance: GO) ............................................................... 4-20  
4.1.2.7 Selecting and setting the function in the B6 mode .............. 4-20  
a. Setting the use of DCU (Guidance: DCU) ...................... 4-20  
4.1.2.8 Setting in the B7 mode (expanded items) ........................... 4-21  
a. Setting expanded items (Guidance: ADD) ...................... 4-21  
b. Reservation (Guidance: SEG_LIM)................................. 4-21  
c. Reservation (Guidance: SEG_ER0)................................ 4-21  
d. Reservation (Guidance: SEG_COR)............................... 4-21  
e. SHL setting (Guidance: SHL).......................................... 4-21  
f. Setting for detecting dirty protection glass  
(Guidance: DIRT) ............................................................ 4-22  
g. Setting the measurement mode (Guidance: DLC).......... 4-22  
h. Space for additional functions (Guidance: A.5V) ............ 4-23  
i. Space for additional functions (Guidance: A.0V) ............ 4-23  
j. Space for additional functions (Guidance: A2.0V) .......... 4-23  
k. Setting the STB length of I/O analog interface  
(Guidance: STB).............................................................. 4-23  
l. Setting the input software filter (Guidance: IFF) ............. 4-23  
m. Setting the application range of calibration  
(Guidance: CAL).............................................................. 4-24  
n. Setting the application range of presetting and mastering  
(Guidance: PST).............................................................. 4-24  
o. Setting the number of programs to be used  
(Guidance: PRGM) .......................................................... 4-24  
4.2 Calibration ................................................................................................... 4-25  
4.2.1 Calibration gages and gage stand ................................................. 4-25  
vii  
No. 99MBC095A  
4.2.2 Entering the calibration mode......................................................... 4-25  
4.2.3 Combined calibration ...................................................................... 4-27  
4.3 Positioning a Gage or a Workpiece............................................................ 4-29  
4.4 How to read-in the amount of light ............................................................. 4-29  
4.5 Setting Up the Functions ............................................................................ 4-31  
4.5.1 Outline of the function setup mode ................................................ 4-31  
4.5.2 Outline of each function setup mode ............................................. 4-32  
4.5.3 Function setup mode ...................................................................... 4-33  
4.5.3.1 F0: Setting the segment ....................................................... 4-34  
4.5.3.2 F1: Setting the measurement interval (measurement time) ... 4-36  
4.5.3.3 F2: Setting the GO/NG judgment criteria ............................. 4-38  
4.5.3.4 F3: Setting the reference value ............................................ 4-42  
4.5.3.5 Analog voltage output and scale value ................................ 4-43  
4.5.3.6 F4: Setting the preset/zero-set values ................................. 4-45  
4.5.3.7 F5: Setting the data output conditions ................................. 4-47  
4.5.3.8 F6: Setting the sample measurement .................................. 4-48  
4.5.3.9 F7: Automatic workpiece detection setting .......................... 4-50  
4.5.3.10 F8: Setting the group judgment............................................ 4-51  
4.5.3.11 Confirming the function setup contents................................ 4-52  
5. MEASUREMENT MODE ...................................................................................... 5-1  
5.1 Outline of the Measurement Mode ............................................................... 5-1  
5.1.1 Settings made in the measurement mode ....................................... 5-1  
5.1.1.1 Setup operation from the arrow key....................................... 5-2  
5.1.1.2 Setup that can be made directly from each setup item key .. 5-4  
5.2 Other Functions ............................................................................................ 5-6  
5.2.1 Key lock ............................................................................................ 5-6  
5.2.2 Displaying the measuring position.................................................... 5-6  
5.3 Applied Measurement ................................................................................... 5-7  
5.3.1 OD measurement of a precision-machined workpiece .................... 5-7  
5.3.2 Measurement of magnet coil wire that runs at high speed.............. 5-8  
5.3.3 Measurement of the lead pitch of a multiple-pin IC ....................... 5-10  
5.3.4 Applied Measurement with Preset/Zero-Set Functions .................. 5-12  
5.3.5 Sample measurement..................................................................... 5-16  
5.3.6 Application of the odd-numbered-edge cutting tool measurement ... 5-18  
5.3.6.1 Odd-numbered-edge cutting tool outside diameter  
measurement ........................................................................ 5-18  
5.3.6.2 Odd-numbered-edge cutting tool run-out measurement ...... 5-20  
5.3.7 Applied measurement with automatic workpiece detection ........... 5-22  
5.3.8 Applied measurement on a stepped round bar.............................. 5-24  
6. INTERFACE UNIT ................................................................................................ 6-1  
6.1 Standard Interface ........................................................................................ 6-1  
6.1.1 I/O Analog Interface.......................................................................... 6-1  
6.1.1.1 External view of the connector ............................................... 6-1  
6.1.1.2 Terminal names ...................................................................... 6-2  
6.1.1.3 Input/output equivalent circuit................................................. 6-2  
6.1.1.4 Timing chart ............................................................................ 6-5  
6.1.2 RS-232C Interface ............................................................................ 6-7  
6.1.2.1 Specifications.......................................................................... 6-7  
6.1.2.2 Connections ............................................................................ 6-8  
6.1.2.3 Printer interface .................................................................... 6-10  
viii  
No. 99MBC095A  
6.1.2.4 RS-232C/GP-IB commands ................................................. 6-10  
6.1.2.5 List of commands ................................................................. 6-12  
6.1.2.6 List of response commands if an error occurs .................... 6-14  
6.1.2.7 Format of response commands ........................................... 6-15  
6.1.2.8 Other commands .................................................................. 6-16  
6.1.2.9 Details of command descriptions ......................................... 6-17  
6.2 Optional Interface........................................................................................ 6-24  
6.2.1 Digimatic Output Unit interface....................................................... 6-24  
6.2.1.1 Method of use....................................................................... 6-24  
6.2.1.2 Name of each part................................................................ 6-25  
6.2.1.3 I/O specifications .................................................................. 6-26  
6.2.1.4 Timing chart .......................................................................... 6-27  
6.2.1.5 Data format ........................................................................... 6-28  
6.2.2 Second Analog I/O Interface .......................................................... 6-30  
6.2.2.1 Method of use....................................................................... 6-30  
6.2.2.2 Name of each part................................................................ 6-30  
6.2.2.3 I/O Interface .......................................................................... 6-31  
6.2.2.4 Analog output ....................................................................... 6-39  
6.2.3 BCD interface ................................................................................. 6-40  
6.2.3.1 Method of use....................................................................... 6-40  
6.2.3.2 Name of each part................................................................ 6-40  
6.2.3.3 Specification ......................................................................... 6-41  
6.2.4 GP-IB interface ............................................................................... 6-46  
6.2.4.1 Method of use....................................................................... 6-46  
6.2.4.2 Name of each part................................................................ 6-46  
6.2.4.3 Specification ......................................................................... 6-47  
6.2.4.4 Functions .............................................................................. 6-49  
6.2.4.5 Operations ............................................................................ 6-50  
6.2.5 Dual-type add-on unit ..................................................................... 6-50  
6.3 Installing the Optional Interface Unit .......................................................... 6-51  
6.3.1 Digimatic Output Unit...................................................................... 6-52  
6.3.2 Second Analog I/O, BCD, and GP-IB interfaces............................ 6-52  
7. INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE.................................................................... 7-1  
7.1 Display Unit ................................................................................................... 7-1  
7.1.1 Display check.................................................................................... 7-1  
7.1.2 Cleaning method............................................................................... 7-1  
7.2 Error Messages and Remedies .................................................................... 7-2  
7.3 Troubleshooting and Remedies .................................................................... 7-3  
7.4 Fuse replacement ......................................................................................... 7-4  
8. SPECIFICATIONS ................................................................................................ 8-1  
8.1 LSM-6200 Display Unit ................................................................................. 8-1  
9. RESTRICTIONS ASSOCIATED WITH THE COMBINATION OF FUNCTIONS,  
TABLES OF THE BASIC SETUP MODES ......................................................... 9-1  
9.1 Restrictions Associated with the Particular Combination of Functions ........ 9-1  
9.2 List of Setup Modes ...................................................................................... 9-2  
9.2.1 List of basic setup modes................................................................. 9-3  
9.2.2 List of calibration functions ............................................................... 9-5  
9.2.3 Reading in the amount of light ......................................................... 9-5  
9.2.4 List of function setup modes ............................................................ 9-6  
ix  
No. 99MBC095A  
MEMO  
No. 99MBC095A  
INTRODUCTION  
This chapter describes the Laser Scan Micrometer (LSM) models and  
nomenclature of the Display unit and the Measuring unit.  
1
1.1 Outline  
This system is an accurate, non-contact measurement system capable of measuring workpiece  
dimensions at a high speed using a highly directional scanning laser beam.  
This non-contact optical measuring system is capable of measuring workpieces which are  
difficult to measure with conventional measuring instruments. It performs simple and  
accurate measurement of brittle or elastic objects, objects at high temperature, objects which  
must be kept clean, and soft objects which may be deformed and suffer dimensional changes  
under the measuring forces used.  
1.2 Foreword  
This user’s manual primarily explains the functions of the Display Unit. For information  
about the safety precautions, specifications, dimensions, standard accessories, and options for  
each Measuring Unit, refer to the user’s manual supplied with the Measuring Unit.  
1.2.1 Measuring units available  
This Display Unit can be used with the following Measuring Units.  
Models  
LSM-500S  
LSM-501S  
LSM-503S  
LSM-506S  
LSM-512S  
LSM-516S  
1.2.2 Using the Measuring Unit separately  
All models, excluding the LSM-500S, can be used separately (the laser emission unit and  
reception unit can be separated) by removing the mount from the Measuring Unit.  
For information about using an LSM separately, refer to the measuring unit user’s manual.  
No. 99MBC095A  
1 - 1  
1.3 Nomenclature  
This section gives the name of each part in the LSM system.  
1.3.1 Display Unit  
(1) Front panel  
Data display  
Operation keys  
S.PR  
PRINT  
Mitutoyo  
DATA C  
RUN  
LASER SCAN MICROMETER  
LSM-6200  
SHIFT  
READ  
H.CAL  
L.CAL  
C.RUN  
SET  
C
PROG.  
7
4
1
0
8
5
2
•
9
6
LIMIT  
P.S V  
P.SET  
LOCK  
CAL  
P.SET  
S.E  
DUAL  
3
MASTER  
REF  
+/-  
LD1 ON  
LD2 ON  
-NG GO +NG  
RUN BUSY  
LOCK A.CL STAT  
UNIT M.CL S.E  
ENT  
Status indicator LEDs (lit/unlit)  
Workpiece position indicator LED  
Power switch  
Stand  
(2) Displays and keys  
S.PR  
PRINT  
DATA C  
RUN  
C.RUN  
SET  
C
SHIFT  
READ  
H.CAL  
L.CAL  
7
4
1
0
8
5
2
•
9
6
LIMIT  
P.S V  
P.SET  
3
MASTER  
+/-  
REF  
LOCK A.CL STAT  
UNIT M.CL S.E  
ENT  
1 - 2  
No. 99MBC095A  
1. INTRODUCTION  
(3) Rear panel  
Optional Interface add-on space  
(Second Analog I/O Unit, BCD Output Unit, GP-IB Unit)  
Optional Dual-type  
Add-on Unit installation space  
Name plate  
Optional Digimatic Output Unit  
add-on space  
AC power inlet  
FOOT  
SW.  
Fuse holder  
SCAN SIG.-1  
ID UNIT 1  
ID  
TRANSMITTER-1  
REMOTE INTERLOCK  
RS-232C  
I/O ANALOG  
AC power inlet  
Foot switch  
Analog I/O connector  
ID Unit Protection cover  
Signal cable connector  
Scanning signal connector  
Remote interlock connector  
RS-232C connector  
TIP 1. A label which describes the terminal block name “I/O ANALOG” can be seen if the  
protective cover of the Analog I/O terminal block is opened. Use this for wiring.  
2. The terminal located at the left end of the power input terminal and marked (by a  
symbol  
) is the grounding terminal to keep the potential of signal line of this  
unit equal with other instrument connected. It is used to enhance resistance  
against electrical interference.  
NOTE Precautions for wiring the terminal block  
1. If wiring the I/O analog terminal and Power input terminal, do not directly touch the  
output terminals of the terminal block by hand, which has static charges, because  
the internal circuit may be damaged by static discharge.  
If your hands are charged, discharge the static energy by touching the metallic  
surface of the Display Unit in advance. In addition, unplug the power cable from  
the outlet before commencing wiring.  
2. After wiring has been completed, close the protective cover.  
3. Do not touch the input terminals on the terminal block during operation, otherwise  
an operation error may result.  
No. 99MBC095A  
1 - 3  
1.3.2 Measuring Unit  
(1) Measuring Unit (integrated-type Measuring Unit)  
LSM-500S  
Laser emission indicator LED  
Emission window  
Emission unit  
Reception unit  
Lens caps  
Serial number label  
Mitutoyo  
L S M - 5 0 0 S  
LASER SCAN MICROMETER  
Signal cable  
Reception window  
Reception window  
(2) Measuring Unit (separate-type Measuring Unit)  
LSM-501S, 503S, 506S, 512S, 516S  
Emission window  
Shutter  
Laser emission  
indicator LED  
Signal cable  
Serial number label  
Mitutoyo  
L S M - 5 0 1 S  
LASER SCAN MICROMETER  
Mount  
Connection cable  
Emission unit  
Reception unit  
1 - 4  
No. 99MBC095A  
SETUP  
This chapter describes the connection between the Display Unit and  
Measuring Unit.  
2
2.1 Unpacking and Acceptance Check  
Your LSM has been thoroughly inspected prior to shipment. The mechanical, electrical, and  
optical systems are guaranteed to operate properly.  
Unpack the package and check that the accessories, for the Display Unit or Measuring Unit,  
and signal cables, etc., are intact and not damaged.  
Contact Mitutoyo if anything is damaged or missing.  
2.2 Connecting the Cables  
Make sure that the power switch is turned off (turn the key switch counterclockwise to align  
with “O”, then pull it out), then connect the cables according to the following procedure.  
Step 1: Integrating the option interface  
For the option interface (Dual-type Add-on Unit, Second Analog I/O Unit, BCD  
Output Unit, GP-IB Unit, and Digimatic Output Unit) to become available with the  
LSM, it must be installed by referring to Section 6.3 “Installing the Optional Inter-  
face Unit”.  
For information about the setup switches on the BCD and GP-IB interface units refer  
to Section 6.2.3, “BCD Interface” and Section 6.2.4, “GP-IB Interface”, respectively.  
No. 99MBC095A  
2 - 1  
Step 2: Attaching the ID unit  
1.Loosen the two screws that secure the ID unit protection cover at the left on the  
real panel of the Display Unit and remove the cover by sliding it rightward.  
2.Remove the dummy ID unit (amber) that has been mounted at the left of the  
“TRANSMITTER-1” connector on the rear panel of the Display Unit, then insert  
the ID unit (beige) that comes in the same package as the Measuring Unit.  
This ID unit stores critical data that ensures the accuracy of the Measuring Unit  
and has the same serial number as the accompanying Measuring Unit. Confirm that  
these two numbers are identical before inserting the ID unit.  
ID unit slot  
ID UNIT 1  
SCAN SIG.-1  
TRANSMITTER-1  
REMOTE INTERLOCK  
ID  
ID unit  
Serial number label  
ID unit  
Measuring unit  
If a Dual-type Add-on Unit is used, install the ID unit in the ID UNIT 2 slot above  
the ID UNIT 1.  
3.Replace and secure the ID unit protection cover revering the procedures in step 1  
above.  
2 - 2  
No. 99MBC095A  
2. SETUP  
IMPORTANT • If the dummy ID unit is still mounted, “  
”
PROG  
PROG  
PROG  
is displayed in the lower section of the display. If  
this is the case, turn off the power and replace the  
dummy ID unit with a proper ID unit.  
• If the ID unit has not been installed, an error  
display as shown at the right will appear in the  
upper section of the data display unit and the  
operation of this unit stops.  
• If the ID unit is not installed or if the serial number of  
the Measuring Unit is not consistent with that on the  
ID unit, the system will not work and an error code  
as shown at the right will be displayed at power on.  
At the same time, the 6-digit serial number of the  
measuring unit is displayed for confirmation.  
If the  
key has been pressed to enter the ready state, measurement can be  
C
automatically started. However, the measuring accuracy can not be guaranteed. If  
the optional dual-type add-on unit is used to perform measurement with two  
Measuring Units, make sure that the serial numbers of the two Measuring Units,  
which are connected to the “TRANSMITTER-1” connector and “TRANSMITTER-2”  
connector, are identical. If neither of the two Measuring Units has a serial number  
identical to that of the ID unit, a serial number of the Measuring Unit on the  
“TRANSMITTER-1” side will be displayed in the upper display section, and that of  
the Measuring Unit on the “TRANSMITTER-2” side will be displayed in the lower  
display section.  
Power  
cord  
ID unit  
ID  
Connecting cable  
Signal cable  
GND lead wire  
Remote interlock  
Step 3: Connecting the connecting cable (except for the LSM-500S)  
Connect the cable which runs from the base of the Measuring Unit to the lower  
connector (5-pin) on the rear panel of the emission unit.  
Step 4: Connecting the signal cable  
Insert the round plug (12-pin) of the signal cable into the upper connector (12-pin)  
on the rear panel of the emission unit. Tighten the ring screw to firmly secure the  
connectors.  
Insert the square connector (15-pin) on the other end of the signal cable into the  
connector “TRANSMITTER-1” at the upper left of the display rear panel and tighten  
the securing screws.  
If measurement is performed with two Measuring Units while using the optional  
dual-type add-on unit, plug the cable from the second Measuring Unit into the  
“TRANSMITTER-2” connector, then firmly tighten the screws.  
Step 5: Connecting the power cord and GND lead wire  
Connect the supplied power cord to the AC connector at the upper right on the rear  
panel of the Display unit. Also be sure to ground the Display unit with the GND lead  
wire for improved resistance to noise.  
No. 99MBC095A  
2 - 3  
Terminal to which a grounding wire is connected.  
Ground the system using the provided grounding wire to avoid the effect of interfer-  
ence noise caused in the setup environment.  
Step 6: Checking the remote interlock connector  
Make sure that the short-circuiting pin is inserted into the “REMOTE INTERLOCK”  
connector on the rear panel of the Display Unit. If this short-circuiting pin is not  
inserted, laser emission is disabled, even if the power switch is on.  
To emergency stop laser emission, refer to the following diagram.  
Switch ON: Laser emission ON  
Switch OFF: Laser emission OFF  
Short-circuiting pin  
Switch  
5V, 3mA  
Applicable connector: PJ-2  
(Manufacturer: Sato Parts)  
NOTE Recovering operation is not guaranteed. Never use this function for other than  
emergency stop.  
Step 7: Connecting the interface  
For information about the procedure used to connect the interface, refer to Section  
6.1.1, “I/O Analog Interface” and Section 6.1.2, “RS-232C Interface”.  
NOTE 1. Note the following when connecting the signal cable.  
For information about the precautions to be observed when connecting the signal  
cable refer to the measuring unit user’s manual.  
2. Note the following when making cable connections.  
Always make connection or disconnection with the power cord unplugged. In  
addition, before connecting to the interface make sure that the power to all other  
units connected or to be connected are also off.  
2 - 4  
No. 99MBC095A  
2. SETUP  
2.3 Preliminary Checks  
The necessary connections should be completed by following the procedure described in the  
previous chapter. Simplified operation checks are described here.  
Step 1: Fully open the lens cap and shutter of the Measuring Unit.  
Fully open the lens caps and beam shutters of both the emission unit and reception  
unit to ready the laser beam for emission.  
The lens caps should be completely removed, and the shutters should be as shown in  
the diagram below.  
Emission window  
Shutter window  
Shutter  
If the shutter is closed  
If the shutter is open  
Step 2: Power on  
• Turn the power key switch on the Display Unit clockwise until it is in the I  
(power on) position and the power is on.  
• This unit enters the self check mode and all the LEDs and segments turn on. They  
will turn off shortly, and eights  
When is displayed across the upper display section, the unit will turn  
off shortly. This is followed by the self check on the lower display section.  
will be displayed in the upper display section.  
PROG  
PROG  
• In the lower display section eights will appear sequentially from the left to  
right.  
• After  
turn off shortly.  
is displayed across the lower display section, it will  
PROG  
PROG  
• Measurement is started.  
The LD1 ON (LD1 ON and LD2 ON in the dual-unit measurement) LED turns on  
and the BUSY LED starts flashing to indicate the measurement has started from  
the ready state.  
Since the objective segment has been set to  
“SEG 1” at the factory, the displayed measure-  
ment shows the laser scanning range of the  
Measuring Unit.  
PROG  
Here, the Display Unit is found to be normal  
because the scanning range is displayed.  
Proceed to Chapter 3, “DISPLAYS AND KEY  
OPERATIONS”, to custom set up each  
function.  
No. 99MBC095A  
2 - 5  
• An error may be displayed at this stage,  
however, the display at the right is not actually  
an error. Check the shutter of the Measuring  
Unit.  
PROG  
For information about other errors that may result refer to Section 8.3, “Error  
Messages and Remedies”.  
2.4 Initializing the LSM-6200 Display Unit  
After making sure that this unit is operating normally, initialize the Display Unit so it can  
recognize the Measuring Unit(s) to be used.  
Initialization of the Display Unit is also required if the Measuring Unit needs to be changed.  
In addition to replacing the ID unit that is associated with the Measuring Unit, initialize the  
Display Unit (i.e. restore the factory setups) with the following procedure.  
The initialization procedure is as follows:  
Step 1: Turn off the power and connect the Measuring Unit with the ID unit that comes with  
the Measuring Unit installed.  
Step 2: Turn on the power while holding down the  
key.  
C
Hold down the key for approximately 2 seconds, even after the power is on.  
C
Step 3: When the self check has been completed, the  
display shown at the right will appear. To initial-  
PROG  
ize, press the  
key. When the initialization  
ENT  
process has been completed, the display restors  
the initial conditions that existed just after the  
power on.  
To abort initialization press a key other than the  
key or turn the power off.  
ENT  
In the former case the initialization process will be aborted and the initial display at  
power-on will be restored.  
NOTE Initialization will clear all the customer setup data and will restore the factory-setups.  
Customize the setups again as necessary.  
2 - 6  
No. 99MBC095A  
DISPLAYS AND KEY  
OPERATIONS  
This Display Unit is provided with many useful functions that can be  
customized according to the user's needs.  
3
This chapter describes these functions and key operations.  
3.1 Outline of the Operation Modes  
3.1.1 Measurement Principle  
In order for the user to understand the measurement principle of the LSM, the following  
paragraphs describe about the system block diagram, segments (measurement positions) and  
measurement interval (measurement time).  
3.1.1.1 Overview  
Unlike light emitted from natural sources, a laser provides extremely fine, rectilinear beams  
which do not diffuse (coherent light beams).  
Using the properties of the laser beam, the Mitutoyo Laser Scan Micrometer (LSM) moves a  
scanning laser beam over the workpiece and determines its dimensions by measuring the  
duration in which the beam is obstructed by the workpiece.  
Workpiece  
Emission unit  
Reception unit  
Condenser lens  
Motor  
Colimator lens  
Polygon mirror  
Reception  
device S  
Polygon mirror  
Photoelectric element  
(reset signal generation)  
Amplifier  
Laser power source Semiconductor laser  
RS  
MP  
Motor driving pulse  
Clock pulse  
ROM RAM  
t
t
t
Segment  
selection circuit  
Counter  
Gate  
Edge signal  
Edge signal  
RS  
CPU  
Data display  
Keyboard  
I/O analog  
interface  
RS-232C  
Foot switch  
Option I/F  
No. 99MBC095A  
3 - 1  
The configuration of the system is shown in the above block diagram. A laser beam emitted  
from the laser oscillator is directed at the polygon mirror which rotates at high speed and is  
synchronized by clock pulses. The laser beam that is reflected by the polygon mirror is then  
collimated by the collimator lens towards the workpiece. As the polygon mirror rotates, this  
horizontal beam scans the workpiece and the beam not obstructed by the workpiece will  
reach the photoelectric element through the condenser lens and induce an output voltage in  
the photoelectric element. The output voltage will change according to the duration over  
which the laser beam is obstructed. Counting pulses generated during that period are used to  
determine the dimension of the obstructed portion. This data is sent to the CPU for process-  
ing and the dimensions are displayed digitally.  
Consequently, either the dimensions of the workpiece (shadowed areas) or workpiece  
clearances (highlighted areas) can be determined by specifying the segments to be measured.  
TIP In the system block diagram described in the previous page, the laser beam passed  
through the collimator lens is made parallel and, at the same time, stopped down so  
that the beam diameter is minimized at the measurement position.  
3 - 2  
No. 99MBC095A  
3. DISPLAYS AND KEY OPERATIONS  
3.1.1.2 Setting the segment  
Set the objective portion of a workpiece to be measured.  
The highlighted and shaded portions created when the laser scans over the workpiece are  
controlled with each assigned number. In the basic setup a selection must be made from one  
of two cases: case where there are 1 to 4 highlighted and shaded sections, and case where  
there are 1 to 127 similar sections. In the former case the portions are controlled through the  
segment number, and are simply called segments. In the latter case the portions are controlled  
by the edge number (edge number is between 1 and 255) and called edges. Edge numbers  
equal to or greater than 256 are not available.  
Edge specification  
Highlight 1  
Segment specification  
EDGE1  
EDGE2  
Highlight 1  
Shade 1  
SEG1  
SEG2  
SEG3  
SEG4  
SEG5  
SEG6  
SEG7  
Shade 1  
Highlight 2  
Shade 2  
EDGE3  
EDGE4  
Highlight 2  
Shade 2  
EDGE5  
Highlight 3  
Shade 3  
Highlight 127  
Highlight 4  
EDGE254  
EDGE255  
Shade 127  
Highlight 128  
EDGE256  
• A maximum of 4 highlighted sections and a  
maximum of 3 shaded sections can be measured.  
• Multiple segments can be specified at the same  
time.  
• A maximum of 127 highlighted sections and a  
maximum of 127 shaded sections can be mea-  
sured.  
• Always specify the start edge and finish edge  
numbers. These two edges can be either contin-  
ued or separated. However, they must not be  
identical.  
• Specify segments 1 to 3 for a transparent object.  
• Edge numbers can not be specified for a transpar-  
ent object.  
• If automatic measurement is specified in the basic  
setup, intervals, outside diameters, or gaps  
between the same shape of multiple pins can be  
automatically measured.  
No. 99MBC095A  
3 - 3  
3.1.1.3 Measurement interval (measurement time)  
A measurement interval (measurement time) varies depending on the averaging method and  
the number of scans selected for the measurement data.  
There are two types of averaging method: the arithmetical average and the moving average.  
Select the one best suited for the user’s purpose.  
1) Arithmetical average  
• If a moving workpiece is measured, the OD of the workpiece is determined by averaging  
the measured data taken from each section (a: first measurement, b: second measurement,  
.... n: nth measurement) of the workpiece the specified number of averaging times, as  
shown below.  
first measurement  
second measurement  
. . .  
nth measurement  
a
b
n
Moving direction  
Moving workpiece  
• One of the following number of averaging times can be selected: 1, 2, 4, 8, ....1024, 2048.  
(If extra fine wire measurement is specified in the basic setup, the number of averaging  
times can be selected from between 16 and 2048.)  
• This is suitable for measuring a still object or the run-out of rollers, etc.  
2) Moving average  
In the moving average method, a measurement interval identical to that in the arithmetical  
average is divided into finer sections such as a1 (1st measurement), a2 (2nd measurement), -  
- - , an (nth measurement). Each measurement is performed almost in parallel. If, for ex-  
ample, the number of averaging times is set to 512, the first measurement requires the  
amount of time that corresponds to 512 scans. However, for the second measurement onward,  
only the time for 16 scannings is required. With respect to a workpiece with a changing OD,  
this method provides data with smooth variation because of the many pieces of data, and also  
quickly detects the trend of workpiece OD variation.  
Measurement with  
Measurement with  
arithmetical averaging  
arithmetical averaging  
an  
an measurement  
. . .  
a2  
a2 measurement  
a1 measurement  
a1  
Moving direction  
Moving workpiece  
Output of an measurement  
Output of a2 measurement  
Output of a1 measurement  
• One of the following number of scans can be selected: 32, 64, 128, ....1024, 2048.  
• This method is suitable for the feedback control of wire drawing machines and extruding  
machines.  
3 - 4  
No. 99MBC095A  
3. DISPLAYS AND KEY OPERATIONS  
3.1.2 Outline of the Operation Modes  
The LSM system has the following modes:  
1: Basic setup mode, 2: Calibration mode, 3: Function setup mode, 4: Other setup mode, 5:  
Statistical result display mode, and 6: Measurement mode.  
Power ON  
Error check  
SET  
Power ON +  
SET  
1 : Basic setup mode  
6 : Measurement mode  
LOCK  
UNIT  
LOCK  
UNIT  
SHIFT  
H.CAL  
L.CAL  
,
,
Ready state  
4: Other setup mode  
2 : Calibration mode  
DATA C  
RUN  
C.RUN  
,
LOCK  
UNIT  
ENT  
(
)
(
,
)
Measurement in progress  
(Program being executed)  
• Single-run measurement  
• Continuous-run  
ENT  
H.CAL  
L.CAL  
C
SET  
•
•
• measurement  
MASTER  
MASTER  
S.PR  
PRINT  
P.S V  
P.SET  
LIMIT  
SHIFT  
SHIFT  
SHIFT  
,
,
+
,
+
REF  
REF  
DATA C  
RUN  
(
)
5 : Statistical result  
display mode  
3 : Function setup mode  
Measured data display  
(Latched display)  
S.PR  
PRINT  
SET  
(
)
SET  
ENT  
•
•
• Latch timer  
C
•
MASTER  
P.S V  
P.SET  
LIMIT  
(
,
,
)
REF  
No. 99MBC095A  
3 - 5  
3.1.2.1 Basic setup mode  
• This mode is used to customize the basic setup conditions, including the resolution,  
interface conditions, and available functions, according to the measurement requirements.  
For more information, refer to Section 4.1, “Basic Setup”.  
• To enter the basic setup mode turn on the power (turn the key switch clockwise from the  
“O” position to the “I” position) while holding down the  
key for about 2 seconds to initiate the basic setup mode.  
key. Hold down the  
SET  
3.1.2.2 Calibration mode  
• Depending on the environment in which the LSM is used and the Display Unit - Measur-  
ing Unit combination, measurement errors may result. Therefore, always perform calibra-  
tion prior to use, taking the measuring range and environmental conditions into account.  
If calibration is performed, the errors described above will be reduced and high accuracy  
will be ensured.  
• Before performing calibration, always make the setups for resolution, simultaneous-  
measurement, dual-unit measurement and available segments in the basic setup mode. If  
this order is reverse, the previously set calibration values may be discarded.  
• For more information, refer to Section 4.2, “Calibration”.  
• Press the  
key to enter the HI CAL mode; and press the  
key to enter the LOW  
L.CAL  
H.CAL  
CAL mode.  
3.1.2.3 Measuring condition setup mode  
• This mode is used to set up measuring conditions, including segments (objective portion of  
workpiece to be measured) and GO/NG judgment criteria.  
• Press the  
key to enable all the function setup items established to be set in a batch.  
SET  
• Each of the  
,
→
,
,
→
keys allows  
MASTER/REF  
LIMIT SHIFT  
P.S V/P.SET  
MASTER/REF SHIFT  
the individual function setup item to be established.  
• Press the  
often.  
key to enter the setup operation for the setup item which is used most  
3.1.2.4 Other setup mode  
• This mode is used to set the key lock and to set the unit of measurement.  
• Press the  
and  
key to turn on and off the key lock; and press only the  
LOCK/UNIT  
SHIFT  
key to enter the unit change mode.  
LOCK/UNIT  
• Press the  
and  
key to enter the measuring position display mode.  
READ  
SHIFT  
3.1.2.5 Statistic display mode  
• Displays the statistical processing results.  
• Press the  
• Press the  
and  
and  
keys in the ready state to enter the statistic display mode.  
keys in the ready state to allow the statistical processing  
STAT/S.E  
SHIFT  
SHIFT  
S.PR/PRINT  
results to be printed.  
3 - 6  
No. 99MBC095A  
3. DISPLAYS AND KEY OPERATIONS  
3.1.2.6 Measurement mode  
This mode can be divided into the following operational states:  
1) Measurement in the ready state  
• This is the measurement mode that is entered immediately after the power is turned on  
or if another measurement mode is aborted by pressing the  
key (or by the RESET  
C
signal from the I/O interface or the “CL” command from the RS-232C/GP-IB interface).  
• It is used to establish setups for calibration and available functions, which are not part  
of the basic setup items, or to enter another measurement mode including single-run  
measurement.  
• Usually GO/NG judgment and analog output will not take place for measurement in the  
ready state, however, these specifications can be made in the basic setup mode.  
• Measurements in the ready state are unavailable for statistical processing.  
2) Single-run measurement  
DATA C/RUN  
• If the  
key (otherwise input RUN via the I/O interface or “R” command via  
the RS-232C/GP-IB interface) is pressed, one session of measurement is performed and  
the results will be automatically subject to GO/NG judgment and analog output. In  
addition, the measured data will be outputted for the RS-232C/GP-IB interface,  
Digimatic Output Unit, and printer. The measured data will be held (latched for the  
specified period) in the display.  
• This data will be available for statistical processing.  
3) Continuous-run measurement  
• If the  
key (otherwise input RUN+RESET via the I/O interface or “CR” command  
C.RUN  
via the RS-232C/GP-IB interface) is pressed, one session of measurement is started and  
repeated the specified number of times. The measured data will be automatically subject  
to GO/NG judgment and analog output. In addition, the measured data will be outputted  
for the RS-232C/GP-IB interface, Digimatic Output Unit, and printer.  
DATA C/RUN  
• Press the  
again to terminate the measurement and hold the measured data on the display. If the  
key (or input RESET via the I/O interface or “CL” command via the RS-232C/GP-  
or  
key (or if RUN is received from the I/O interface)  
C.RUN  
C
IB interface) is pressed halfway, the measurement is aborted and the ready state is  
returned to.  
• The measurements are available for statistical processing.  
4) Continuous measurement with a term specification  
• This will take place where RUN input from the I/O interface has been assigned so as to  
start a term-specified continuous-run measurement in the basic setup.  
• Repeatedly performs single-run measurement while RUN signal input continues, which  
is basically the same as the continuous-run measurement. Therefore, hereafter, continu-  
ous-run measurement includes the ones with a term specification.  
• The measurements are available for statistical processing.  
No. 99MBC095A  
3 - 7  
5) Zero-run measurement  
• A measurement where the number of samples is set to “0” is called a “zero-run mea-  
surement”.  
DATA C/RUN  
• If the  
key (otherwise input RUN via the I/O interface or the “R” command  
via the RS-232C/GP-IB interface) is pressed, single-run measurement is started and  
DATA C/RUN  
repeated until the  
key is pressed again (or RUN is inputted via the I/O  
interface or the “STOP” command is inputted via the RS-232C/GP-IB interface). From  
the measured data the calculation items (mean, maximum value, minimum value, and  
range) that have been set for the sample measurement will be calculated and the  
resulting data will be automatically subject to GO/NG judgment and analog output. In  
addition, the measured data will be outputted for the RS-232C/GP-IB interface,  
Digimatic Output Unit, and printer. The measured data will be held on the display.  
• The measured data are available for statistical processing.  
• This is suitable for run-out measurement and cylindricity measurement.  
6) Sample measurement  
• A measurement where the number of samples is set to “2~999” is called a “sample  
measurement”.  
• In practice this will take place as a single-run measurement or a continuous-run mea-  
surement (with a term specification).  
From the measured data the calculation items (mean, maximum value, minimum value,  
and range) that have been set for the sample measurement will be calculated and the  
resulting data will be automatically subject to GO/NG judgment and analog output. In  
addition, the measured data will be outputted for the RS-232C/GP-IB interface,  
Digimatic Output Unit, and printer.  
• The measured data are available for statistical processing.  
• This is suitable for run-out measurement and cylindricity measurement.  
7) Statistical processing  
• Measured data from single-run and continuous-run measurements can be statistically  
processed (i.e. the number of measurement times, standard deviation, maximum value,  
minimum value, mean, and range are calculated).  
These statistical processing results can be outputted for the display, printer (statistical  
memory for all programs will be cleared after printout), and RS-232C/GP-IB interface.  
• Press the  
key (or input “ST” command via the RS-232C/GP-IB interface) to  
STAT/S.E  
start statistical processing, and press it again (or input the “NST” command via the RS-  
232C/GP-IB interface) to terminate statistical processing.  
• Performs single-run measurements or continuous-run measurements to store statistical  
data after statistical processing has been started.  
• Pressing the  
measurement.  
• Pressing the  
→
, and  
keys in this order will cancel the last  
SHIFT  
DATA C/RUN  
ENT  
and  
keys will display the results of statistical processing.  
is pressed.  
STAT/S.E  
SHIFT  
The item displayed will change each time the key  
ENT  
The display item will change in this sequence: [N: Measurement number], [S.D:  
Standard deviation], [MAX: Maximum value], [MIN: Minimum value], [AVG: Mean  
value], and [R: Range (Max - Min)].  
Statistical processing will be performed independently for each program.  
• Press the  
key to clear the statistical memory of the foreground program  
A.CL/M.CL  
(case of a simultaneous measurement), and press the  
clear the statistical memory of all the programs.  
and  
keys to  
A.CL/M.CL  
SHIFT  
• These statistical results data will be stored in memory while the power is on, and will  
be lost when the power is turned off.  
3 - 8  
No. 99MBC095A  
3. DISPLAYS AND KEY OPERATIONS  
3.2 Techniques and Terminology of Setup Functions  
3.2.1 Program  
• A measurement will be automatically performed according to the registered (programmed)  
contents including the segment (feature to be measured) and GO/NG judgment criteria,  
etc., in advance. Registration is performed in the function setup mode.  
• This unit can hold a maximum 100 programs, which may include various settings suitable  
for up to hundred kinds of workpieces.  
• Program numbers are divided into groups, each of which has up to ten programs and is  
referred to as a channel (CH).  
These two-digit program numbers define the meanings as shown in the table below.  
Digit of ten  
Digit of one  
Program No.  
Application  
16  
Channel No.  
0 to 9  
Individual No.  
For each channel  
0 to 9  
• As the expanded basic setup it is possible to select the range of applying calibration.  
1. Applies uniformly to the entire 100 programs (factory default).  
2. Applies individually to each channel (10 programs).  
• With the expanded basic setup it is possible to select the range of applying presetting and  
mastering.  
1. Applies uniformly to the entire 100 programs (factory default).  
2. Applies individually to each channel (10 programs).  
3. Applies individually to each program.  
• As the expanded basic setup it is possible to select either the “100 Program mode” or “10  
program mode”, which limits the number of available programs to ten. (The factory  
default setting is the 100 program mode.)  
• As the basic setup it is possible to select either the “Single measurement mode” which  
uses 100 programs (10 programs in the 10 program mode) as independent programs or the  
“Simultaneous measurement mode” which uses two specific programs as a pair.  
NOTE • If the program must be switched to another with the RS-232C/GP-IB command, it  
is necessary to use a separate command for the 100 program mode or 10 pro-  
gram mode.  
For more information about the RS-232C/GP-IB command refer to Section 6.1.2.4  
“RS-232C/GP-IB Commands”.  
• In the 10 program mode the user can make use of the RS-232C/GP-IB commands  
provided for Mitutoyo old models (LSM-6000, 6100) without further modification. It  
is advised for the customers, who are operating Mitutoyo old models (LSM-6000,  
6100) with the RS-232C communication commands, to use the 10 program mode.  
No. 99MBC095A  
3 - 9  
a) Single measurement  
One session of measurement will be performed according to the one specified program.  
The factory default setting is this single measurement.  
b) Simultaneous measurement  
• In one measurement session two specific programs are executed at one time as a pair.  
Combinations of program numbers to form these pairs are shown in the following table.  
• To run a pair of programs, either of the two can be specified via one of the numeric  
keys and the one specified is called “foreground program”, and its counterpart is called  
“background program”.  
<<Possible combinations in the 100 program mode>>  
Channel No. (Digit of ten of the program number) [0 to 4]  
0
1
2
3
4
00 & 05  
01 & 06  
02 & 07  
03 & 08  
04 & 09  
10 & 15  
11 & 16  
12 & 17  
13 & 18  
14 & 19  
20 & 25  
21 & 26  
22 & 27  
23 & 28  
24 & 29  
30 & 35  
31 & 36  
32 & 37  
33 & 38  
34 & 39  
40 & 45  
41 & 46  
42 & 47  
43 & 48  
44 & 49  
Program  
numbers pairs  
Channel No. (Digit of ten of the program number) [5 to 9]  
5
6
7
8
9
50 & 55  
51 & 56  
52 & 57  
53 & 58  
54 & 59  
60 & 65  
61 & 66  
62 & 67  
63 & 68  
64 & 69  
70 & 75  
71 & 76  
72 & 77  
73 & 78  
74 & 79  
80 & 85  
81 & 86  
82 & 87  
83 & 88  
84 & 89  
90 & 95  
91 & 96  
92 & 97  
93 & 98  
94 & 99  
Program  
numbers pairs  
<< Possible combinations in the 10 program mode>>  
00 & 05  
01 & 06  
Program  
numbers pairs  
02 & 07  
03 & 08  
04 & 09  
3.2.2 Basic setup  
• This is used to customize the basic setup conditions, including the resolution, available  
functions, and interface conditions, according to the measurement requirements.  
• This basic setup must be performed at the beginning of a measurement. Note that changing  
the setup of resolution, simultaneous measurement, or dual-unit measurement in this basic  
setup cancel the existing calibration values and function setup.  
• The basic setup mode is entered by turning on the power while holding down the  
SET  
key.  
Note that no response will be made to an I/O interface input and RS-232C/GP-IB com-  
mand in the basic setup mode.  
• For more information, refer to Section 4.1, “Basic Setup”.  
3 - 10  
No. 99MBC095A  
3. DISPLAYS AND KEY OPERATIONS  
3.2.3 Function setup  
• Use this procedure to set up the conditions necessary for measurement.]  
For each program number register measurement conditions including the segment (part  
feature to be measured), measurement interval (measurement time), and GO/NG judgment  
criteria that are the best suited for the objective workpiece.  
• To enter the function setup mode press the  
key in the ready state. Each of the  
SET  
,
→
,
,
→
keys allows the individual  
MASTER/REF  
LIMIT SHIFT  
P.S V/P.SET  
MASTER/REF SHIFT  
setup item to be established, and the  
key enters the setup operation for items which  
are most frequently accessed for set up.  
• For more information refer to Section 4.5, “Setting Up the Functions”.  
3.2.4 Setups according to the property of each workpiece  
For measuring workpieces that transmit light or have a dimension smaller than the diameter  
of the scanning beam it is critical to make setups that take into account the properties of the  
workpiece.  
3.2.4.1 Transparent object (Workpiece that transmits light)  
a) Round bar  
• Workpieces such as fiber optics and glass tubes are more or less transparent, while  
workpieces made of steel are not. This requires different segment settings.  
The segment settings for an opaque object and a transparent object are as follows:  
• Setup for measurement of transparent or opaque object is possible in the basic setup.  
Photo-electric signal  
Laser scan direction  
Segment 1  
Segment 2  
Segment 3  
Segment 4  
Segment 5  
Segment 1  
Segment 2  
Transparent  
Workpiece  
Segment 3  
For opaque object  
For transparent object  
Binary voltage (SHL)  
No. 99MBC095A  
3 - 11  
b) Plate (Sheet)  
• In the case of the width measurement of a transparent plate with no chamfer on edges,  
measurement may not be possible since acute-edge signals cannot be produced for such  
edges.  
Photo-electric signal  
Laser scan direction  
Transparent Workpiece  
Measurement is aborted  
because a sharp edge  
can not be determined.  
Ideal edge signal  
Binary voltage level (SHL)  
• For measuring a transparent plate-shaped workpiece  
Take the following precautions:  
1. Incline the workpiece.  
By inclining the workpiece it is possible to attain a sharp edge from the light con-  
trast. In this case:  
Measurement : W = W0 (workpiece dimension) x cos θ  
Direction of light is turned, and is not incidental to the photo-electric element.  
θ
Workpiece  
W
W0  
2. Chamfering  
Chamfer the workpiece edge by W. W will vary depending on the model. Always  
use values larger than those in the table below.  
Measuring Unit model  
Chamfering amount: W  
0.1 mm  
W
LSM-500S  
LSM-501S  
LSM-503S  
LSM-506S  
LSM-512S  
LSM-516S  
Workpiece  
0.1 mm  
0.2 mm  
0.4 mm  
Direction of light is turned,  
and is not incidental to the  
photo-electric element.  
0.8 mm  
1.2 mm  
3 - 12  
No. 99MBC095A  
3. DISPLAYS AND KEY OPERATIONS  
3. Changing the SHL  
• With the reference workpiece set up on the Measuring Unit, connect the oscilloscope  
to the [SCAN SIG.] terminal on the rear panel of the Display Unit and observe the  
signal.  
• SHL is the signal level for detecting a workpiece. Changing the level from the  
standard level of 50% to a level such as 75% will enable the measurement of a  
transparent sheet. The measurement accuracy, however, will be degraded since  
measured data fluctuates according to the edge conditions of the sheet.  
• It is possible to set the SHL level between 5% to 95% for "7 SHL" by setting up  
"7 ADD"="USE" and "7 DLC"="OFF" in the expanded basic setup.  
NOTE Measuring accuracy differs from that of the standard set up.  
• Measured data differs with the change of the SHL. Perform calibration again if the  
SHL setting has been changed.  
• Measurement error can be reduced by performing calibration with the reference  
standard, the edges of which have been made in the same condition as those of the  
sheet to be measured.  
Photo-electric signal  
Laser scan direction  
Transparent Workpiece  
v 1  
v 2  
v1: Peak voltage of photo-electric signal  
v2: Larger voltage of the two at edges  
(as generated at the edge with  
better transmittance)  
Standard SHL (50%)  
New SHL: Set to 50 (1+v2/v1)%  
IMPORTANT • When the SHL (signal level for detecting a workpiece) is modified, the measure-  
ment accuracy will be inevitably reduced, since the measured data may easily  
fluctuate with the edge conditions.  
• Once the SHL (signal level for detecting a workpiece) has been modified, always  
perform another calibration.  
• If an identical edge form is selected for both for the calibration standard and  
workpiece (sheet), it may be possible to reduce these measurement errors.  
No. 99MBC095A  
3 - 13  
3.2.4.2 Ultra-fine wire measurement  
• In the special ultra-fine wire measuring region, a clear shade can not be obtained because a  
workpiece, with a finer diameter than that of the laser beam at the focal position, must be  
measured. Therefore, this wire diameter must be calculated according to a special algo-  
rithm. This requires the following restrictions to be taken into account in the basic setup  
where an ultra-fine wire measurement is designated.  
a) Measuring interval (measurement time)  
Note that the measurement time for the first measurement becomes 0.02 seconds longer  
than the first interval since the wire diameter must be identified at the start of ultra-fine  
wire measurement.  
• Single-run measurement:  
(Measurement interval + 0.02 seconds)  
• Continuous-run measurement: (Measurement interval + 0.02 seconds) for the first  
measurement, and at regular measurement intervals  
for the second and subsequent measurements.  
b) Number of averaging times  
Select a number between 16 and 2048.  
c) Designation of the objective portion of workpiece to be measured  
Only a segment specification is allowed, but an edge specification is not. If an edge  
specification has been made before the setup for the ultra-fine wire measurement is  
established, it is automatically changed to segment specification.  
In other cases where multiple segments are set for the LSM-500S, the minimum  
allowable measuring range begins at 0.1 mm. In addition, if a workpiece measures less  
than 0.1 mm, only one segment can be specified.  
d) Others  
In extra-fine wire measurements, simultaneous measurement, dual measurement  
(measurement using two measuring units), workpiece automatic detection, and group  
judgment can not be set up. Setups for these functions are automatically canceled.  
• The measuring position is a critical factor for ultra-fine wire measurement. Always  
perform the measurement at the focal position of laser beam while referring to Section  
5.2.2 “Displaying the measuring position”. In other cases where a fine gap is to be  
measured, the amount of laser light may be insufficient, resulting in unstable measure-  
ments. Refer to Section 4.4, “Recording the Amount of Light”, and store the amount of  
light without the workpiece and fixtures in the optical path.  
• The following table shows the measuring ranges if “Not performing ultra-fine wire  
measurement” is designated on the LSM-500S.  
Standard measuring range  
(at the factory)  
Measuring range if “ Not performing ultra-fine wire  
measurement” is designated  
Measuring range  
LSM-500S  
0.005 to 2 mm  
0.1 to 2 mm  
• The ultra-fine wire measurement function is only available on the LSM-500S.  
3 - 14  
No. 99MBC095A  
3. DISPLAYS AND KEY OPERATIONS  
IMPORTANT 1. For measuring ultra fine wire with a diameter thinner than that of the laser beam,  
the SHL (signal level for detecting a workpiece) needs to be changed according to  
the workpiece size (external diameter).  
2. Since the SHL is changed to the level most appropriate for the workpiece size,  
multiple workpieces or workpiece fixtures existing within the laser scanning range  
may disable the detection of a workpiece less than 0.05 mm in diameter. Exercise  
care so as not to produce multiple shadows within the scanning range.  
3. Also, if the segment is set to 1 or 3, it is not possible to determine the position of  
a fine workpiece less than 0.05 mm in diameter, runout, and bending.  
No. 99MBC095A  
3 - 15  
3.2.5 Measurement of an odd-numbered-edge cutting tool  
• This function is used to measure the diameter or run-out of cutting tool (drill or end mills,  
etc.)that has an odd number (3, 5, ...) of cutting edges.  
• When the outside diameter, øD, of an odd-numbered-edge cutting tool is measured, the  
measurement errors as shown in the figure below will result if this LSM unit is set to  
Segment 2 (normal outside diameter measurement) for measurement.  
To avoid these errors, in this case, first install the reference bar as shown below, then  
perform the measurement while rotating the odd-numbered-edge cutting tool. Calculate the  
outside diameter of the odd-numbered-edge cutting tool by obtaining the difference  
between “Peak value of Segment 2+3” and “Bottom value of Segment 3” while the cutting  
tool rotates more than one turns from the beginning of measurement.  
Then save the bottom value of Segment 3 into memory as many as the number of cutting  
edges being set, and calculate the range (maximum - minimum) as the “run-out”.  
Odd-numbered-edge cutting tool  
Segment 3  
(minimum value)  
Error  
Reference bar  
• For the measurement examples and setup method refer to Section 5.3.6 “Application of the  
odd-numbered-edge cutting tool measurement”.  
TIP • As shown in the figure at the right it is also possible to measure with the reference  
bar being located in the Segment 1 side.  
In this case the “outside diameter”  
of the odd-numbered-edge cutting  
Reference bar  
tool can be calculated by obtaining  
Odd-numbered-edge  
the difference between “Peak value  
of Segment 1+2” and “Bottom value  
of Segment +1” while the cutting  
tool rotates more than one turns  
from the beginning of measure-  
ment.  
Segment 1  
(minimum value)  
cutting tool  
Also, the “run-out” can be calcu-  
lated by saving the bottom value of  
Segment 1 into memory as many  
as the number of cutting edges  
Error  
being set to Segment 1, and calculate the range (maximum - minimum).  
• It is necessary to select, in the basic setup, whether the reference bar is located in  
the Segment 1 side or in the Segment 3 side.  
3 - 16  
No. 99MBC095A  
3. DISPLAYS AND KEY OPERATIONS  
3.2.6 Measurement with two Measuring Units (dual-unit measurement)  
• The LSM-500S series Measuring Unit allows measurement to be performed with two  
Measuring Units, if the optional dual-type add-on unit is provided.  
To use two Measuring Units they must be the same model.  
• About Measuring Unit 1 which is connected to “TRANSMITTER-1” side, and Measuring  
Unit 2 which is connected to “TRANSMITTER-2” side  
a) The W.P. (Work Position) LED shows the workpiece position of the Measuring Unit 1  
when the least significant digit of program number between 0 and 4 is specified, and  
that of the Measuring Unit 2 when the least significant digit of program number  
between 5 and 9 is specified.  
b) Select he least significant digit of program number between 0 and 4 to calibrate  
Measuring Unit 1, and between 5 and 9 to calibrate Measuring Unit 2.  
LSM-6100 Display unit  
Measuring unit 2  
Least significant digit of program number: 5 - 9  
“TRANSMITTER-2”  
Least significant digit of program number: 0 - 4  
Measuring unit 1  
“TRANSMITTER-1”  
• If the dual-type add-on unit is mounted, select the type of dual-unit measurement in the  
basic setup.  
Note that if the type of dual-unit measurement is changed in the basic setup, calibration  
values and function setups will be default-set.  
• If the dual-type add-on unit is not set, the setup guidance for it will not be displayed.  
• Suspended use of Measuring Unit  
For repair or adjustment services one of the Measuring Units employed for dual-unit  
measurement may be suspended from operation. If this is the case, turn off the power and  
disconnect the Measuring Unit. If the Measuring Unit 1 has been disconnected, the  
Measuring Unit 2 must be connected to the TRANSMITTER-1 while re-installing the  
corresponding ID unit in place. After removal of one measuring unit, designate  
in the basic setup (4.1.2.3 Selecting an setting the function in the B2 mode: d. Setting the  
dual-unit measurement).  
If one Measuring Unit is removed without this designation, “Err-8” will result and the  
other Measuring Unit will also become inoperable.  
Note that suspending one Measuring Unit will cause the calibration values and function  
setups to be reset to their defaults.  
• The type of dual-unit measurement includes DW-, DXY-, and DF-types.  
No. 99MBC095A  
3 - 17  
3.2.6.1 DW type  
• This setting is used if two workpieces are measured by two measuring units set in parallel.  
• On each of the Measuring Units 1 and 2 the measuring position can be selected from  
segments 1 to 7 (1 to 3 for measuring a transparent object) or edges 1 to 255.  
SEG  
1
2
3
4
5
Measuring unit 2  
6
Display unit  
7
Least significant digit of  
program number: 5 - 9  
Least significant digit of  
program number: 0 - 4  
SEG  
1
2
4
6
3
5
7
Measuring unit 1  
• Calibration  
Select each segment for Measuring Unit 1 with the least significant digit of program  
number between 0 and 4, and select each segment for Measuring Unit 2 with the least  
significant digit of program number between 5 and 9.  
3 - 18  
No. 99MBC095A  
3. DISPLAYS AND KEY OPERATIONS  
3.2.6.2 DXY type  
• Used to perform X-Y (2-axis) measurement with two Measuring Units positioned perpen-  
dicular to each other.  
• For DXY-type measurement the objective portion of the workpiece to be measured should  
be selected through segment specification, not by edge specification.  
Select segments 1 to 3 for Measuring Unit 1, and select segments 5 to 7 for Measuring  
Unit 2.  
SEG 5  
SEG 6  
SEG 7  
SEG 1  
SEG 2  
SEG 3  
Display unit  
Least significant digit of  
program number: 0 - 4  
Measuring unit 1  
(X-axis direction)  
Least significant digit of  
program number: 5 - 9  
Measuring unit 2  
(Y-axis direction)  
• Calibration  
Select each segment (between 1 and 3) for Measuring Unit 1 with the least significant  
digit of program number between 0 and 4, and select each segment (between 5 and 7) for  
Measuring Unit 2 with the least significant digit of program number between 5 and 9.  
• Any program number can be assigned to segments 1 to 3 (in the X direction) and segments  
5 to 7 (in the Y direction).  
• If one segment for each of the X and Y directions are selected (e.g. 2 + 6), calculation is  
made possible between the measurements from these segments in the X and Y directions.  
The calculation items can be selected in the basic setup by arithmetic addition: (X + Y),  
mean outside diameter: (X + Y) / 2, Difference: (X-Y), and film thickness: (X-Y) /2.  
No. 99MBC095A  
3 - 19  
3.2.6.3 DF type  
• Used to measure the diameter of a large workpiece using two Measuring Units facing each  
other, one stacked on top of the other, or positioned back to back.  
• For DF-type measurement the objective portion of the workpiece to be measured should be  
selected through segment specification, not by edge specification.  
Select segments 1 to 3 for Measuring Unit 1, and select segments 5 to 7 for Measuring  
Unit 2.  
Display unit  
SEG 5  
Least significant digit of  
Measuring unit 2  
program number: 5 - 9  
Least significant digit of  
Measuring unit 1  
program number: 0 - 4  
SEG 1  
SEG 7  
SEG 6  
Least significant digit of  
Measuring unit 2  
SEG 5  
program number: 5 - 9  
Least significant digit of  
program number: 0 - 4  
SEG 1  
SEG 2  
SEG 3  
Measuring unit 1  
a) Example of units facing each other  
Display unit  
SEG 5  
Least significant digit of  
program number: 5 - 9  
Measuring unit 2  
Least significant digit of  
program number: 0 - 4  
Measuring unit 1  
SEG 1  
SEG 5  
SEG 6  
Least significant digit of  
program number: 5 - 9  
Measuring unit 2  
Measuring unit 1  
SEG 7  
Least significant digit of  
program number: 0 - 4  
SEG 1  
SEG 2  
SEG 3  
b) Example of stacked units  
3 - 20  
No. 99MBC095A  
3. DISPLAYS AND KEY OPERATIONS  
Display unit  
SEG 5  
SEG 1  
Least significant digit of  
program number: 5 - 9  
Measuring unit 2  
Measuring unit 1  
Least significant digit of  
program number: 0 - 4  
SEG 7  
SEG 6  
Least significant digit of  
program number: 5 - 9  
Measuring unit 2  
Measuring unit 1  
SEG 5  
Least significant digit of  
program number: 0 - 4  
SEG 3  
SEG 2  
SEG 1  
c) Example of units positioned back to back  
• Position two Measuring Units back to back as shown in 3) above to measure a transparent  
object with the DF-type setup.  
Transparent objects may not be measured with units facing each other or stacked one on  
top of another.  
• For information about techniques to improve the measuring accuracy refer to the measur-  
ing unit user’s manual.  
• Calibration and combined offset  
a) Separate calibration for each Measuring Unit  
Perform the calibration after selecting Segment (1 ~ 3) at the Measuring Unit 1 side  
with the least significant digit of program number set to between 0 and 4 for Measuring  
Unit 1, and Segment (5 ~ 7) at the Measuring Unit 1 side with the least significant digit  
of program number set to between 5 and 9 for Measuring Unit 2, respectively.  
b) Combined calibration  
In addition to being able to perform separate calibration for each Measuring Unit, the  
DF-type setup allows the use of combined calibration where segments are assigned over  
two Measuring Units.  
This combined calibration is effected from either combination of segments (1 + 5) or (1  
+ 7).  
Note that cancellation of separate calibration will also cancel the combined calibration.  
IMPORTANT Since the reflection light from a large-diameter workpiece (skip phenomenon) is  
generated in DF-type measurement, the accuracy decreases to some extent, com-  
pared with the linearity of each measuring unit. The following figure shows that  
undesired values e1 and e2 are generated due to reflected light. The undesired  
value (e1, e2) increases with the diameter of the workpiece (e2 > e1). This depends  
on the reflectivity of the surface.  
Therefore, if each measuring unit is calibrated independently using a small diameter  
gage, an error may result if a large diameter is measured.  
No. 99MBC095A  
3 - 21  
Reception lens  
e1  
θ
S
Workpiece  
Photoelectric device  
(a) Measuring a small diameter workpiece  
Reception lens  
e2  
θ
S
Workpiece  
(b) Measuring a large diameter workpiece  
If a large-sized workpiece is measured using the DF-type setup, combined calibration  
will ensure more accurate measurment.  
c) Combined preset  
While combined calibration is used to measure workpieces of various sizes, the com-  
bined preset is used to measure workpieces with a dimension close to the reference  
gauge.  
Since, at a combined preset, separate values can be set for each program number, a  
maximum of 100 kinds of workpieces can be registered. To perform the combined  
preset make the measuring positions of the reference gauge and workpiece as consistent  
as possible.  
Designate the combined preset by combining segments such as (1 + 5) or (1 + 7), and  
set the direction to negative (1).  
However, if this is coupled with a combined calibration, set the direction to positive (0).  
3.2.7 Latch (holding) of the displayed value  
• In a single-run measurement, etc., GO/NG judgment and analog output will be continued  
while the measured data is latched (held) on the display for the specified period of time.  
After the set period elapses, system operation returns to the ready state.  
• Set up the display latch timer in the basic setup.  
• While the display is being latched, inputs from the I/O interface or RS-232C/GP-IB are  
still valid.  
3 - 22  
No. 99MBC095A  
3. DISPLAYS AND KEY OPERATIONS  
3.2.8 Automatic measurement with an edge specification  
• If the edge specification is made, it is possible to automatically measure IC or connector  
leads with respect to their pitch (even intervals), outside diameter, or gap. This is suitable  
for inspecting the IC lead bend, etc.  
Outside  
diameter  
Gap  
Pitch  
Laser  
scanning  
direction  
• This function is only in effect if the necessary setups are made for edge specification in  
the basic setup.  
• In the function setup designate whether automatic measurement should be performed (for  
pitch/outside diameter/gap measurement) or not (manual measurement). Also designate  
both the start and finish edges.  
• This is available in combination with automatic workpiece detection.  
• If automatic measurement has also been selected, the following will take place.  
a) In the ready state the first objective portion of the workpiece to be measured will be  
displayed.  
b) Automatic measurement will be involved in a single-run measurement or continuous-  
run measurement.  
If “Err-0” (insufficient number of edges to be measured) is detected, the measuring  
operation is stopped for the single-run measurement, and the collected measured data is  
cleared for continuous measurement to wait for a proper workpiece to be loaded.  
c) If the measured data is found to be ±NG, the first source of the ±NG will be displayed  
and the measuring operation is stopped. If GO results, the mean of all measurements is  
displayed.  
d) If the measured data falls within the range of GO, the elapsed measurement time was as  
follows:  
(Number of measurement edges) x (measurement interval) + (calculation time: 20 ms)  
e) The W.P. LED shows the current portion of the workpiece being measured.  
No. 99MBC095A  
3 - 23  
3.2.9 GO/NG judgment  
• All the measured data are subject to GO/NG judgment.  
To enable, set the GO/NG judgment criteria in advance.  
• The following settings can be made in the basic setup.  
a) The method of tolerance judgment can be selected from (Lower limit value and upper  
limit value), multi-limit selection (7 limits) and (Target value and tolerance values:  
upper tolerance value and lower tolerance value).  
To output the judgment result with the multi-limit selection it is necessary to select the  
optional Second Analog I/O Interface.  
b) Simultaneous measurement can be specified. To do this, it is necessary to select the  
optional Second Analog I/O Interface for tolerance result output.  
c) For (Target value and tolerance values), the user is permitted to select whether the  
target value is to be copied to the reference value. If it is, the setup guidance for the  
reference value will not appear.  
d) Even in the ready state it is possible to select whether tolerance judgment and analog  
output are performed. If they are, tolerance judgment and analog output will take place  
in the ready state, however, these data are not available for statistical processing.  
e) Abnormal data elimination, tolerance judgment, group judgment, and analog output can  
be performed in a single-run measurement, zero-run measurement, sample measure-  
ment, and continuous-run measurement (with a term specification). The judgment result  
will be indicated by the -NG (red LED), GO (green LED), and +NG (red LED) indica-  
tors and outputted to the I/O interface and RS-232C (including printer)/GP-IB interface.  
f) The following tables show the relationship between the measured data and tolerance  
judgment method  
1) (Lower and upper limit values)  
GO/NG judgment  
Measurement (judged if both the lower and upper limit values are set)  
Measurement < Lower limit value  
-NG  
GO  
Lower limit value ≤ Measurement < Upper limit value  
Measurement ≥ Upper limit value  
+NG  
2) (Target value and tolerance values)  
Measurement (judged if the target value, lower tolerance value and upper  
tolerance value are set)  
GO/NG judgment  
-NG  
GO  
Measurement < (Target value + lower tolerance limit)  
(Target value + lower tolerance value) ≤ Measurement < (Target value + upper  
tolerance value)  
+NG  
Measurement ≥ (Target value + upper tolerance value)  
3 - 24  
No. 99MBC095A  
3. DISPLAYS AND KEY OPERATIONS  
3) If all limits from L1 to L6 are set for multi-limit selection  
Multi-limit selection output  
GO/NG judgment  
Measurement from L1 to L6 are set.  
Measurement < L1  
L1  
L2  
L3  
L4  
L5  
L6  
L7  
-NG  
GO  
L1 ≤ Measurement < L2  
L2 ≤ Measurement < L3  
L3 ≤ Measurement < L4  
L4 ≤ Measurement < L5  
L5 ≤ Measurement < L6  
L6 ≤ Measurement  
GO  
GO  
GO  
GO  
+NG  
4) If only L1 and L2 are set for multi-limit selection  
Measurement Only L1 and L2 are set.  
Multi-limit selection output  
GO/NG judgment  
(Judgment will not be performed if only one  
stage is set.)  
L1  
L2  
-NG  
GO  
Measurement < L1  
L1 ≤ Measurement < L2  
L2 ≤ Measurement  
L3 ~ L7  
+NG  
No. 99MBC095A  
3 - 25  
3.2.10 Abnormal data elimination  
• The abnormal data elimination function eliminates measurements that are very different  
from those specified for the machined workpiece, from the measurement data (neither the  
measurement is displayed nor is data output performed).  
If, for example, the grindstone of a centerless grinder is controlled based on the measured  
data from the LSM, it is possible that a large measurement error may be created due to the  
coolant used with the workpiece.  
As shown in the figure below where foreign matter (with a height of h) adheres to within  
the averaging region L of the workpiece (with a diameter of D). An abnormal outside  
diameter results in the region of l and the displayed measurement will be (D + lh / L). As  
the result the grinder is subject to improper control that involves some error.  
L
l
h
D
Workpiece  
Workpiece feed direction  
Because the use of this function can eliminate abnormal measurement data generated due  
to the adhered foreign matter, the grindstone can be controlled and fed properly.  
• Judgment of valid data or abnormal data will be performed at each measurement interval.  
Valid data includes those satisfy the following relation: Lower abnormal limit ≤ (Measure-  
ment) < Upper abnormal limit. All other data will be discarded as abnormal data.  
• The following table shows the relationship between measurements and upper and lower  
abnormal limits.  
Measurement (Judged if both the upper and lower  
Eliminate/Do not eliminate  
abnormal limits are set.)  
Eliminate  
Measurement < Lower abnormal limit  
Do not eliminate  
(accepted as a measurement) abnormal limit  
Lower abnormal limit ≤ Measurement < Upper  
Eliminate  
Measurement ≥ Upper abnormal limit  
• In the basic setup select whether this abnormal data elimination function should be used. If  
it is the setting of (lower abnormal limit, upper abnormal limit, and count value) should be  
performed before actual tolerance judgment.  
This count value indicates the number of pieces of abnormal data that occurred until the  
alarm will be issued. This alarm output will be sent to the optional Second Analog I/O  
Interface by CNT form (The alarm will not be issued if the count value is set to zero).  
• Abnormal data elimination function effects in single-run and continuous-run measure-  
ments.  
• If “Err-0” (specified workpiece not present) is displayed in the sample measurement, the  
valid data collected will be discarded.  
NOTE If a long series of abnormal data appears, measurement can no longer be continued  
since most of the measured data must be eliminated. To avoid this problem, always  
monitor CNT output.  
3 - 26  
No. 99MBC095A  
3. DISPLAYS AND KEY OPERATIONS  
3.2.11 Preset/Zero-set  
This function is used to measure the difference between the workpiece and the reference gage  
or to measure the workpiece that is larger than the measuring range of the LSM.  
a) Preset  
• In this system the operation of setting the reference gage dimension is called the  
preset operation.  
• This function is applied to measure the absolute dimension of a workpiece.  
b) Zero-set  
• Setting the reference gage dimension to “0.0” for the purpose of comparing it with a  
workpiece dimension is called the zero-set.  
• This function is applied to measure a deviation from the reference gage dimension.  
c) Direction  
Depending on the objective portion of measurement of a workpiece, the positive  
direction (set as “0”) or negative direction (set as “1”) must be set.  
If, for example, the shaded portion of D in the following diagram is measured, the  
direction must be set as positive (0). If the highlighted portion (gap) of W is to be  
measured for determining the workpiece dimension L, the direction must be specified  
as negative (1).  
Set as positive (0)  
Set as negative (1)  
Reference piece  
W
L
D
Workpiece  
Workpiece  
Reference plane  
• Preset operation takes about 1 second to determine the compensation value by measuring  
the reference gage.  
• Preset value will be ineffective if the segment or edge number is changed (Preset value is  
unique to each segment or edge).  
3.2.12 Mastering  
• If the objective workpieces are high-precision gages that are machined successively, the  
above described preset/zero-set values may need to be fine-adjusted to the master. This  
fine-adjustment is called mastering.  
After mastering, the total compensation value will be:  
(Preset value/zero-set value) + (±Mastering value)  
Setting a positive (+) mastering value allows the measurement of a workpiece OD to be  
greater than the raw measurement, and setting a negative (-) mastering value allows the  
measurement of a workpiece OD to be smaller than the raw measurement.  
• Because no measurement is required for this mastering, the reference gauge is not required  
either.  
• Set the reference gage dimension with the preset function and perform mastering.  
No. 99MBC095A  
3 - 27  
3.2.13 Reference value  
• This function is used to output deviations (measured data - reference value) between the  
reference value and the actual measurements of a workpiece for the Analog I/O Interface.  
Before analog output, set the reference value and the scale value (gain).  
• Measured data is outputted as analog signals at a full scale of ±5V.  
Analog signal = (Measured data - reference value) x scale value (gain)  
• In the basic setup the following conditions can be set.  
a) Whether the target value of GO/NG judgment is be copied to the reference value. If this  
is selected, the setup guidance for the reference value will not be displayed, so only the  
scale value must be set.  
b) It is also possible to set so that tolerance judgment and analog output can take place in  
the ready state.  
• Analog output is automatically enabled if single-run measurement or continuous-run  
measurement is performed.  
• If the reference value is being set the deviation value will be output for the RS-232C/GP-  
IB interface and the printer if single-run measurement or continuous-run measurement is  
performed.  
3.2.14 Data output conditions  
• In single-run measurement or continuous-run measurement, measured data can be output-  
ted for each measurement if ±NG occurs, or at given intervals to the RS-232C/GP-IB  
interface, printer, or Mitutoyo Digimatic Output Unit.  
RS-232C  
Data output condition  
GP-IB  
DCU  
Printer  
Remark  
0
1
2
3
The periodical output timer can be set  
The periodical output timer can be set  
4
5
6
7
8
9
The periodical output timer can be set  
C.RUN  
: Outputted for each measurement if DATA C/RUN or  
key, etc., is pressed.  
DATA C/RUN  
C.RUN  
: Press the  
: Press the  
or  
or  
key to trigger the measurement. The measured data will be outputted if it falls on GO.  
key to trigger the measurement. The measured data will be outputted if it falls on –NG.  
DATA C/RUN  
C.RUN  
: No output will be made.  
3 - 28  
No. 99MBC095A  
3. DISPLAYS AND KEY OPERATIONS  
3.2.15 Automatic workpiece detection <OD detection method, Position detection method>  
• Automatic workpiece detection is performed for continuous-run measurement, where  
measurement starts with no specified workpiece present (Err-0), then proceeds to auto-  
matic detection of the workpiece, followed by measurement repeated number of times. No  
specified workpiece present (Err-5) also refers to the workpiece outside the upper and  
lower detection limits.  
• Whether automatic workpiece detection is performed is specified in the basic setup mode.  
If automatic workpiece detection is specified, the number of scanning times for detection  
must be specified from among 1 and 16. Select 16 times if detecting precision workpieces.  
If automatic workpiece detection is not specified, no further setting is necessary.  
• Automatic workpiece detection setup includes the number of measurement times, invalida-  
tion period, upper and lower detection limits. Set both the upper and lower detection  
limits.  
• To exclude the measured data of such as chamfered portion of the workpiece, invalidation  
period can be set within the range from 0.001 sec to 9.999 sec.  
Invalidation  
elapses  
Measured the specified  
number to times  
Start of  
measurement  
No workpiece  
detected  
Detection of  
workpiece  
1) OD detection method  
• This is used to automatically detect a workpiece that enters the laser scanning plane  
perpendicularly.  
• For actual detection of a workpiece the displayed measurement (after calibration and  
preset) is used.  
• One session of automatic detection consists of no workpiece being detected, detec-  
tion of a workpiece with a dimension that is within the detection range (between the  
upper and lower detection limits), an invalidation period required to exclude invalid  
dimensions (of chamfered portions, etc.) from the measurement, and effective  
measurement for the specified number of times. The final measurement result will be  
latched (held) on the display. Once entering the effective measurement the upper and  
lower detection limits will no longer be checked.  
• The speed of workpiece detection (i.e. the number of scans) can be specified as  
either 1 or 16 in the basic setup.  
• Use 16 times in the following cases:  
* If connecting bars are used between workpieces for feeding convenience and for  
setting appropriate intervals between workpieces, and, if the difference in the  
outside diameter between the workpiece and the bar is insufficient.  
* If the feed rate is low.  
• The following diagram is an example where a workpiece with a chamfered outside  
diameter of D mm and a length of ᐉ mm moves at a velocity of V mm/s.  
ᐉ
Scanning beam  
g
c
a
D
Workpiece flow  
V mm/s  
No. 99MBC095A  
3 - 29  
Setting example:  
• Lower detection limit: L < (a +D) / 2  
• Upper detection limit: H > Upper limit of the measuring range or 1.1 D  
(This setting may be omitted.)  
• Invalidation period : T > (c / V) ms  
•
Number of measurements: N < (ᐉ - 2c) x 0.8 (safety factor) / measurement interval / V  
2) Position detection method  
• This is used to automatically detect a workpiece that enters the measuring region in  
the laser scanning plane in the same direction of the scan.  
• Workpiece detection is performed with one scan, and 16 scans can not be specified  
(If specified in the basic setup, the specification will be ignored).  
• One session of automatic detection consists of the detection of no workpiece,  
detection of a workpiece edge with a dimension that falls within the detection range  
(between the upper and lower detection limits), an invalidation period required to  
exclude invalid dimensions from the measurement, and effective measurement for the  
specified number of times. Once the effective measurement has been entered, the  
upper and lower detection limits will no longer be checked.  
• In the following diagram, workpiece positions (a) and (b) result in no workpiece  
being present, and in (c) it is judged that a workpiece is present.  
Detected edge  
(a)  
L : Lower detection limit  
H : Upper detection limit  
C : Detection range  
L
(b)  
H
C
(c)  
Vmm/S  
Setting example:  
Assuming the workpiece diameter as D (mm) and the moving speed as V (mm/s):  
• Lower detection limit: L > (Laser scanning range - measuring region) / 2  
• Upper detection limit: H < (Laser scanning range + measuring region ) / 2 - D (This  
setting may be omitted.)  
• Invalidation period : Generally set to 0 ms.  
• Number of measurements: N = 1  
NOTE • Allow a sufficient margin for the lower detection limit, upper detection limit, invali-  
dation period, and number of measuring times when setting them. If this surplus is  
not sufficient, the measurement may not be achieved.  
• If using the sample measurement, specify the number of measuring times to 1.  
• The automatic workpiece detection functions in the continuous-run measurement.  
3 - 30  
No. 99MBC095A  
3. DISPLAYS AND KEY OPERATIONS  
3.2.16 Group judgment  
• While the tolerance judgment is applied to each measurement from a workpiece, this group  
judgment is applied to a group of the specified number of workpieces.  
Judgment to Group 1  
2
Judgment to Group 2  
5
Judgment to Group 3  
8
1
3
4
6
7
Individual  
judgment  
Individual  
judgment  
Individual  
judgment  
Individual  
judgment  
Individual  
judgment  
Individual  
judgment  
Individual  
judgment  
Individual  
judgment  
Output of individual  
judgment result  
Output of  
judgment  
result 1  
Output of  
judgment  
result 2  
Output of  
judgment  
result 3  
Output of  
judgment  
result 4  
Output of  
judgment  
result 5  
Output of  
judgment  
result 6  
Output of  
judgment  
result 7  
Output of group judgment result  
Output of  
judgment result 2  
Output of judgment result 1  
• In the basic setup select whether group judgment is to be performed. If it is, then set the  
group size (the number of workpieces included in a group), calculation items (mean,  
maximum value, minimum value, and range), and group lower limit and upper limit. If  
“Not performing group judgment” is selected, the setup guidance for it will not be dis-  
played.  
• The group judgment will be in effect in a single-run measurement or continuous-run  
measurement.  
a) For the result display and GO/NG judgment indication each individual measurement  
and judgment result will be used.  
b) Output of judgment result  
1. If only the standard Analog I/O Interface is used  
Each individual judgment result will be outputted.  
2. If the second Analog I/O Interface is used  
Each individual judgment result will be outputted for A-(+NG), A-(GO), and A-(-  
NG), and the group judgment result will be outputted for B-(+NG), B-(GO), and B-(-  
NG), respectively.  
c) RS-232C/GP-IB output  
In the basic setup it is possible to set whether the group judgment result data is output-  
ted for the RS-232C/GP-IB interface. If it is, the output contents from the group  
judgment will be as follows:  
P0,  
P0,  
P0,  
( GO) 12.34567 ... Individual data  
( GO) 12.34560 ... Individual data  
(+NG) 12.34600 ... Individual data  
GP0, ( GO) 12.34575 ... Group judgment result data  
• Each individual piece of measurement data can be the objective of statistical processing,  
however, group measurement data will be excluded from statistical processing.  
• Even if “Err-0” (specified workpiece not present) occurs, the obtained data will not be  
cleared. To abort the measurement, press the  
key (or input RESET via the I/O  
C
Interface or the “CL” command via the RS-232C/GP-IB interface).  
No. 99MBC095A  
3 - 31  
3.2.17 Recording the amount of light  
• The gap measurement may be unstable if not enough laser beam passes through the gaps.  
In the case shown in diagram (a) below, an adequate amount of light can be obtained as  
the laser passes through gap (g) above the workpiece, even if the gap (t) is small. How-  
ever, in diagram (b) where gap (t) is small, measurement will be affected. In this case,  
therefore, it is necessary to have the system record the full amount of light when there is  
no obstruction (workpiece or fixture) in the optical path.  
Photo-electric signal  
g: Gap for the  
reference beam  
Laser beam  
passes through  
this gap.  
t
Light amount  
can be detected  
Workpiece  
Gap  
Peak of the  
photo-electric  
signal  
(a) Light amount can be detected normally = Auto-detecting  
Light amount  
cannot be detected  
(insufficient duration)  
t
Workpiece  
Gap  
(b) Recording the amount of light is required  
• Normally the amount of incident light is continuously checked so that the counting  
operation can follow the change in the amount of incident light. Have the system record  
the light amount following 4.4, “Recording the light amount”. It is also necessary to carry  
out this operation twice or three times each year since the light amount of the system may  
vary.  
• If the amount of light is recorded, temperature drift of the measured data becomes larger.  
• The minimum size of gap (t) that can be measured depends on each Measuring Unit as  
shown below:  
Model name  
LSM-500S  
LSM-501S  
LSM-503S  
LSM-506S  
LSM-512S  
LSM-516S  
Gap: g or t  
0.2 mm or more  
0.3 mm or more  
1 mm or more  
2 mm or more  
4 mm or more  
6 mm or more  
3 - 32  
No. 99MBC095A  
3. DISPLAYS AND KEY OPERATIONS  
3.3 Outline of the Display Contents  
Displays of this system are effected by the display unit and guidance LEDs.  
3.3.1 Display unit  
The name of each part of the display unit and the LEDs are given below:  
Data display unit (fluorescent display tube)  
PROG  
Upper display section  
Lower display section  
Measurement state guidance  
LOCK CAL  
P.SET  
S.E  
DUAL  
LD1 ON  
GO +NG  
RUN BUSY  
-NG  
LD2 ON  
BUSY LED  
RUN LED  
GO/NG judgment LEDs  
LD oscillation LED  
W.P. (Work Position) LED  
3.3.2 Data display unit  
1) Numeric and character display  
• Single measurement: Turns off.  
• Simultaneous measurement:  
Displays a background program number.  
• Displays a settting item in the single measurement.  
• Single measurement: Displays a setup value.  
• Simultaneous measurement:  
Displays the measured data of a background program.  
• Displays the unit of measurement.  
• Displays the measured  
data of a foreground program.  
• Displays a foreground program number.  
2) Operation state guidance  
• LOCK: Turns on in the key lock state, which is initiated by pressing both the  
SHIFT  
and  
keys. If these keys are input the key lock state will be can-  
LOCK/UNIT  
celed.  
Turns on if the calibration (HIGH) is specified.  
• P.SET: Turns on if the preset function is active.  
• S.E: Turns on if statistical processing is activated.  
• DUAL: Turns on if simultaneous measurement is specified.  
• CAL:  
No. 99MBC095A  
3 - 33  
3) Display LED  
• W.P. (Work Position) LED  
LED segments corresponding to a region shaded by the workpiece, which blocks the  
laser beam, will turn off. This is used to check if the workpiece is located in the center  
of the measuring region.  
• LD oscillation LED  
1. LD1 ON : Indicates that the laser in the Measuring Unit connected to the  
“TRANSMITTER-1” connector is oscillating. If a dual-unit measurement is not  
performed (standard specification), only this LED lights and the LD2 LED is off.  
2. LD2 ON : Indicates that the laser in the Measuring Unit connected to the  
“TRANSMITTER-2” connector is oscillating. This LED also lights for a dual-unit  
measurement.  
• GO/NG judgment LED  
1. -NG : Turns on if the measured data is -NG.  
2. GO : Turns on if the measured data is GO.  
3. +NG : Turns on if the measured data is +NG.  
• RUN LED  
Turns on if a single-run measurement, continuous-run measurement or continuous-run  
measurement with a term specification is performed.  
• BUSY LED  
Turns on each time the measured data is updated.  
IMPORTANT Laser safety  
For safety, the laser will not turn on until 5 seconds after the power is turned on. If  
the power is unintentionally turned on, turn off the power within 5 seconds to secure  
the laser.  
3 - 34  
No. 99MBC095A  
3. DISPLAYS AND KEY OPERATIONS  
3.4 Outline of Key Operations  
On this system operate the keys as follows.  
• The  
key, for example, has two functions as  
STAT/S.E  
PROG  
indicated on the upper and lower portions of the key  
top. The function on the upper portion can be activated  
by simply pressing the key, and the one on the lower  
portion can be activated by pressing the key while  
holding down the  
key. If the  
key is  
SHIFT  
SHIFT  
pressed, the currently displayed program number flashes  
for about 10 seconds until another key is pressed.  
During this period one of the functions in the upper  
portions of the keys can be selected. Press the  
key while the program number is flashing.  
STAT/S.E  
• To enter the reference gage values, such as HIGH CAL, LOW CAL and preset, or other  
setup values such as reference values and GO/NG judgment criteria, etc., the numeric keys  
(
to  
,
,
) and arrow keys (  
,
,
and  
) can be  
.
+/-  
0
9
used.  
a) If a setup value entry is started with a numeric key and an arrow key is pressed halfway,  
an operation error will result. The following example shows a case of an preset value.  
1. Enter the setup mode of the preset function.  
The least significant digit of the existing preset value  
is flashing.  
PROG  
2. Change the value to 12.00 mm.  
PROG  
PROG  
PROG  
Press the  
key.  
1
3. If an arrow key is pressed at this point, an operation  
error occurs, however the display does not change.  
4. To enable the entry of an arrow key, press the  
C
key to cancel the setup value.  
Now the arrow keys are operable.  
No. 99MBC095A  
3 - 35  
b) If a measurement is read as the setup data by pressing the  
key or if the entry of a  
READ  
setup value is started with an arrow key and a numeric key is pressed halfway an operation  
error will result. See the example above.  
1. Enter the setup mode of the offset function.  
The least significant digit of the existing offset value  
flashes.  
PROG  
PROG  
PROG  
PROG  
2. Enter the  
key.  
3. If a numeric key is pressed at this point, an operation  
error occurs, however the display does not change.  
4. To enable the entry of a numeric key, press the  
key to cancel the setup value.  
Now the numeric keys are operable.  
C
3 - 36  
No. 99MBC095A  
3. DISPLAYS AND KEY OPERATIONS  
3.4.1 Description of key functions  
Key name  
• In the ready state  
• At single-run measurement  
• At setup  
• In the display-latched state  
• At continuous-run measurement  
• Combined use with power-on  
• operation  
• Changes the program number  
• Operation error  
• Operation error  
• Enters the setup data.  
0
•
9
• Operation error  
• Enters a decimal point.  
• Operation error  
• Operation error  
• Inverts the sign of the setup value.  
+/-  
• Aborts the measurement and  
• returns to the ready state.  
• Cancels the setup value or resets  
• it to initial value.  
• Cancels the error state.  
• Cancels the error that occurred  
when the power was turned on.  
• Cancels the latched state and  
• returns to the ready state.  
C
C
•
+ power-on will enter the  
• initialization mode of the Display  
• Unit.  
• Shift key  
• Operation error  
READ  
• Entry of SHIFT  
+
• To enter the function indicated in  
• the upper portion of a double-  
• function key, such as the  
STAT  
• (to set the light amount detecting  
• function) is valid when the function  
• setup item number flashes in the  
• function setup mode.  
SHIFT  
SHIFT  
key, hold down the  
S.E  
• before pressing the key.  
• A foreground program number will  
• flash for about 10 seconds.  
• Performs single-run measurement  
• (even in the display-latched state).  
• Results in a single-run  
• measurement error.  
• Quits the measuring operation for  
• continuous-run measurement.  
• Operation error  
• Operation error  
DATA C  
RUN  
• Enters in the mode to cancel the  
previous measurement result.  
• To accept the cancellation and  
returnto the standby state, press the  
• Operation error  
DATA C  
SHIFT  
RUN  
ENT  
key while “CANCEL” is  
blinking in the upper display section.  
• Starts continuous-run measurement • Quits the measuring operation for  
• Operation error  
• Operation error  
• (even in the display-latched state).  
• continuous-run measurement  
C.RUN  
•
DATA C  
(same as  
).  
RUN  
• Prints out the previous  
• measurement data.  
• Results in a single-run  
measurement error.  
S.PR  
PRINT  
• Prints out the data currently  
• displayed in the display-latched  
• state.  
• Prints out the previous  
• measurement data in  
• continuous-run measurement.  
• If the printer is active, prints out all • Operation error  
• the statistical processing data and  
• clears the statistical memory.  
• If the printer is not active, results in  
• an operation error.  
• Operation error  
S.PR  
PRINT  
SHIFT  
No. 99MBC095A  
3 - 37  
Key name  
• In the ready state  
• At single-run measurement  
• At setup  
• In the display-latched state  
• At continuous-run measurement  
• Combined use with power-on  
• operation  
• Enters the function setup mode.  
• Operation error  
• Exits from the function setup mode  
• and returns to the ready state.  
• Enters the state that is entered just  
• after the power is turned on, if in  
• the basic setup mode.  
SET  
•
+ power-on is used to enter  
SET  
• the basic setup mode.  
• Directly enters the setup mode for  
• GO/NG judgment.  
• Operation error  
ENT  
• Press  
to complete the setup  
• operation and return to the ready  
• state.  
LIMIT  
LIMIT  
SET  
• Press  
or  
to abort the  
• setup operation and return to the  
• ready state.  
• Performs zero-setting (in the  
• positive direction) if an preset value  
• is not set.  
• Operation error  
• Operation error  
P.S V  
• If an preset value is set, executes  
• the preset function with the preset  
• value being set.  
P.SET  
• Operation error  
• Directly enters the setup for  
• mastering.  
• Press ENT to complete the setup  
• operation and return to the ready  
• state.  
MASTER  
REF  
SHIFT  
MASTER  
REF  
SET  
• Press  
or  
• to abort the setup operation and  
• return to the ready state.  
• Directly enters the setup operation  
• for the reference value and scale  
• value.  
• Operation error  
• Press ENT to complete the setup  
• operation and return to the ready  
• If "Copying the target value to the  
• reference value" is specified in the  
• basic setup, only the setup  
• operation for the scale value takes  
• place.  
• state.  
MASTER  
REF  
MASTER  
SET  
• Press  
or  
to abort the  
REF  
• setup operation and return to the  
• ready state.  
• Preset can be set.  
• Operation error  
• Operation error  
C
• Pressing the  
and  
P.S V  
SHIFT  
ENT  
P.SET  
ENT  
keys clear Preset/Zero-set.  
• Operation error  
• Operation error  
• Accepts the setup data that is  
• pressed.  
3 - 38  
No. 99MBC095A  
3. DISPLAYS AND KEY OPERATIONS  
Key name  
• In the ready state  
• At single-run measurement  
• At setup  
• In the display-latched state  
• At continuous-run measurement  
• Combined use with power-on  
• operation  
• Enables/disables statistical  
• processing.  
• If statistical processing is active,  
• measurement state guidance (  
• Operation error  
• Operation error  
STAT  
S.E  
)
• for statistical processing turns on.  
• Enters the statistic display mode  
• and displays N in the statistical  
• memory.  
• Operation error  
• Operation error  
• Each time the ENT key is  
STAT  
S.E  
SHIFT  
• pressed S.D, MAX, MIN, AVG,  
• R, and N are sequentially displayed.  
STAT  
S.E  
• Press  
or  
to  
SET  
• restore the ready state.  
• Enters the clear mode of the  
• statistical memory for the specified  
• program number.  
• Operation error  
• Operation error  
• Operation error  
• Operation error  
ENT  
• Press  
to execute clear, and  
A.CL  
M.CL  
•
A.CL  
M.CL  
SET  
pressing  
or  
to abort the  
• clearing operation and return to the  
ready state.  
• Operation error  
• Enters the clear mode of the  
• statistical memory for all program  
• numbers.  
ENT  
• Press  
to execute clear, and  
A.CL  
M.CL  
SHIFT  
•
A.CL  
M.CL  
SET  
press  
or  
to abort the  
• clearing operation and return to the  
• ready state.  
• Enters the unit change mode.  
• Operation error  
ENT  
• Press  
to execute a change of  
LOCK  
UNIT  
•
LOCK  
SET  
units, and press  
or  
UNIT  
• to abort the unit change operation  
• and returns to the ready state.  
• Enters the key lock mode, turns on • Operation error  
• the measurement state guidance  
• Operation error  
• ( ) for the key lock function, then  
• prohibits subsequent key inputs.  
• If these keys are pressed again in the  
key lock state, it will be canceled.  
LOCK  
UNIT  
SHIFT  
No. 99MBC095A  
3 - 39  
Key name  
• In the ready state  
• At single-run measurement  
• At setup  
• In the display-latched state  
• At continuous-run measurement  
• Combined use with power-on  
• operation  
• Enters the HIGH CAL setup mode. • Operation error  
ENT  
• (Input of gage diameter) +  
• executes HI CAL and illuminates  
• the measurement state guidance (  
• for CAL.  
)
H.CAL  
H.CAL  
SET  
• Press  
or  
in the HI CAL  
• setup mode to abort the setup  
• operation and return to the ready  
• state.  
• Enters the LOW CAL setup mode. • Operation error  
• (Input of gage diameter) + ENT  
• executes LOW CAL.  
L.CAL  
SET  
• Press  
or  
in the  
L.CAL  
• LOW CAL setup mode to abort the  
• setup operation and return to the  
• ready state.  
• Operation error  
• Operation error  
• Reads the measurement of the  
• reference gage as the setup value.  
• The read value can be modified with  
READ  
•
the  
,
,
,
•
and  
keys.  
• Operation error  
• If this entry is made when the  
• function setup item number is  
• flashing in the function setup mode,  
• which was accessed by the  
• Enters the detection mode of the  
• measurement position  
• (focal position).  
READ  
SHIFT  
READ  
SET  
• Press  
or  
to restore the  
SET  
key, the setup operation for  
• ready state.  
• the light amount detection is entered.  
• This is used to enter the setup mode • Operation error  
• for the setup item that is being  
• displayed in the upper section of the  
• display unit.  
• Move left key  
• Operation error  
• Operation error  
• Operation error  
• Operation error  
• Operation error  
• Operation error  
• Move right key  
• Up key to increment the setup value.  
• Down key to decrement the setup  
• value.  
3 - 40  
No. 99MBC095A  
3. DISPLAYS AND KEY OPERATIONS  
3.4.2 Example key operations  
As an example operation this section uses an update of the tolerance limits which are  
displayed in the upper display section while in the ready state. Suppose that the new lower  
tolerance limit is “12.34500” and the upper tolerance limit is “12.34600” and that the current  
values are “12.00000” and “12.00100”.  
In the example below, we start with canceling existing upper and lower tolerance limits since  
the lower tolerance limit to be set is smaller than the existing upper tolerance limit. If this is  
the case, setting the lower tolerance limit first causes an error (ERR-5).  
Step 1: In the ready state press the  
key to make  
PROG  
the setup item being displayed flash in the upper  
display section.  
Each time the  
key is pressed, while the setup item is flashing, the setup item  
will change sequentially: Segment  
→ Measurement interval  
→ Lower  
limit value  
If the  
→ Upper limit value  
→ Reference value  
→ Preset  
→ Mastering  
→
key is pressed, the setup item will change in the reverse order.  
As the displayed setup items vary with the results of the basic setup, refer to Section  
5.1.1, “Settings made in the measurement mode”  
Step 2: If the upper limit value is going to be canceled,  
PROG  
make the  
guidance flash.  
Step 3: Press either the  
or  
key to make the  
PROG  
PROG  
PROG  
PROG  
ENT  
least significant digit of the setup data flash.  
Step 4: To cancel the upper limit value press the  
C
key to set the setup data to “0”.  
Step 5: If the  
key is pressed, the upper limit value  
ENT  
is canceled and system operation returns to the  
ready state.  
Step 6: After making the  
the key, press the  
enter the setup mode for the lower limit value.  
guidance flash by pressing  
and keys to  
ENT  
Step 7: Press the  
key to set the display of the lower  
PROG  
C
limit value to “0” (can be omitted), then enter a  
new lower limit value of “12.34500”.  
No. 99MBC095A  
3 - 41  
1) Each time the numeric key is pressed  
the corresponding digit will be  
PROG  
PROG  
PROG  
PROG  
1
2
.
placed in the position of the least  
significant digit, as shown in the  
figure on the right. In this example  
insignificant zeros (  
) are  
0
0
not entered, they will be automati-  
cally added to fill the remaining digit  
places when the  
pressed.  
key is  
ENT  
3
↓
PROG  
PROG  
5
4
2) Press the  
key to save the setup  
ENT  
data of the lower limit value, and  
return to the ready state.  
ENT  
If “Inserting a comma (,) after the  
thousandth digit” is specified in the  
basic setup, it will be automatically  
inserted when the  
pressed.  
key is  
ENT  
Step 8: As in steps 6 and 7, enter a new upper limit value.  
PROG  
PROG  
Step 9: If the  
key is pressed, the setup data of the  
ENT  
upper limit value is saved in memory, then  
operation returns to the ready state.  
Step 10:Here, for practice, intentionally enter the incorrect  
PROG  
upper limit value of “12.34800” then correct it.  
Step 11:Enter the setup mode for the upper limit value  
again.  
PROG  
PROG  
PROG  
PROG  
1) Press the  
digit flash.  
key twice to make the third  
key twice to change the third  
key to save the setup data. The  
2) Press the  
digit to “6”.  
3) Press the  
ENT  
operation will be automatically return to the  
ready state.  
3 - 42  
No. 99MBC095A  
3. DISPLAYS AND KEY OPERATIONS  
The following describes how to use the arrow keys using step 7 as an example.  
1) Now, the setup data of “0” is displayed as a  
result of having pressed the key.  
PROG  
C
2) If the  
key is pressed, the digit places are  
PROG  
automatically filled with zeros to reflect the set  
resolution, with the appropriate number of  
commas inserted after the thousandth digit, then  
the highlighted digit moves one position to the  
left.  
If the  
key is pressed, the digit places are  
PROG  
PROG  
automatically filled with zeros to reflect the set  
resolution, with the appropriate number of  
commas inserted after the thousandth digit, then  
the least significant digit increases by one.  
If the  
key is pressed, the digit places are  
automatically filled with zeros to reflect the set  
resolution, with the appropriate number of  
commas inserted after the thousandth digit, then  
the least significant digit decreases by one,  
resulting in a negative value.  
If the  
key is pressed, the digit places are  
PROG  
automatically filled with zeros to reflect the set  
resolution, with the appropriate number of  
commas inserted after the thousandth digit, then  
the most significant digit that can be set starts  
flashing.  
Here, for practice, press the  
key.  
3) Press the key twice to move the digit to  
PROG  
PROG  
PROG  
PROG  
PROG  
be set to the third digit place, then press the  
key five times.  
4) Press the  
key to move the digit to be set  
to the forth digit place, then press the  
key four times.  
5) Press the  
key to move the target digit to  
be set to the fifth digit, then press the  
key three times.  
6) Press the  
key to move the digit to be set  
to the sixth digit place, then press the  
key twice.  
7) Press the  
key to move the target digit to  
be set to the seventh digit place, then press the  
key.  
No. 99MBC095A  
3 - 43  
8) Press the  
memory.  
key to save the setup value in  
PROG  
ENT  
NOTE Rounding setup value  
Setup value will be rounded off automatically if its least significant digit does not  
agree with the resolution of the display.  
Example: In case the resolution is 0.05 µm  
12.345,64 > 12.345,60 (least significant digit 4 is rounded off to 0)  
12.345,67 > 12.345,65 (least significant digit 7 is rounded off to 5)  
TIP About the input of setup data  
1. How to enter a sign  
PROG  
If “Perform GO/NG judgment by (target value +  
tolerance)” has been specified in the basic setup  
and the lower tolerance limit is “-0.015”, input as  
follows. In this case a “0” does not need to be  
placed in the integer section.  
PROG  
PROG  
(
)
.
0
0
1
5
+/  
-
2.  
key: About the read operation  
READ  
Generally, in the calibration or offset value setup operation a reference gage is  
used, resulting in a measured data that is very close to the setup value. If this is  
the case, first read a measurement as the setup data, then correct the minor  
difference.  
3. To enter a numeric value such as a gage diameter, it is more convenient to use  
the numeric keys. To correct a specific digit, it is more convenient to use the  
arrow keys.  
4. To select a setup item such as the resolution in the basic setup, it is better to use  
the  
or  
key. Use of a numeric key causes an operation error.  
3 - 44  
No. 99MBC095A  
SETTING UP THE  
MEASURING CONDITIONS  
Set up the various functions as required to customize the system for the  
4
utmost measurement accuracy.  
4.1 Basic Setup  
• In the basic setup mode select and modify the appropriate functions to meet your measur-  
ing purpose. It is not necessary to set up functions which will not be used.  
• The basic setup should be performed at the beginning of operation.  
Modification of the basic setup after calibration or function setup has been made may  
result in the cancellation of the calibration or function setup values.  
• RS-232C/GP-IB commands and input from the (Second) Analog I/O Interface can not be  
accepted in the basic setup mode.  
No. 99MBC095A  
4- 1  
4.1.1 Outline of the basic setup procedure  
SET  
Basic setup mode (can be entered by pressing the  
key + Power ON)  
Mode No.  
Setup contents  
B0  
a. Setting the resolution  
b. Setting the number of blanked out (display-off) digits  
c. Setting whether a comma (",") is inserted after the thousandth digit  
d. Setting the buzzer function  
e. Setting the period of the display latch timer  
B1  
a. Setting whether to perform GO/NG judgment result output and analog output in the ready state  
b. Setting the analog output voltage if Err-0 occurs  
c. Setting the display message if Err-0 occurs  
d. Setting the display message at the start of measurement  
e. Setting the averaging method  
f. Setting the GO/NG judgment method  
g. Setting whether the target value is copied to the reference value  
a. Setting the workpiece type (opaque or transparent)  
b. Setting whether to perform ultra-fine wire measurement  
c. Setting the simultaneous measurement  
B2  
B3  
d. Setting the dual-unit measurement  
e. Setting the DXY-type calculation  
f. Setting the method of specifying segments  
a. Setting the abnormal value elimination function  
b. Setting the automatic workpiece detection function  
c. Setting the number of scans  
d. Setting the group judgment  
e. Setting the output function to the RS-232C/GP-IB interface  
f. Setting the odd-numbered-edge cutting tool measurement  
B4  
a. Setting the use of the RS-232C port  
b. Setting the RS-232C communication baud rate  
c. Setting the RS-232C communication data bits  
d. Setting the RS-232C communication parity bit  
e. Setting the delimiter for communication  
f. Setting the RS-232C line control  
B5  
B6  
a. Setting the RUN input function from the I/O interface  
b. Setting the OFFS input function from the I/O interface  
c. Setting the GO output function from the I/O interface  
a. Setting the use of DCU  
Ready state  
4 - 2  
No. 99MBC095A  
4. SETTING UP THE MEASURING CONDITIONS  
Expanded basic setup mode (can be entered by pressing the  
key + Power ON)  
9
Basic Setup No.  
B0 to B6  
B7  
Setup contents  
General items  
a. Setting whether the expansion item is used  
b. Space for additional functions (not for ordinary use)  
c. Space for additional functions (not for ordinary use)  
d. Space for additional functions (not for ordinary use)  
e. Setting the SHL  
f. Setting the protection glass stain detecting function  
g. Setting the measurement method  
h. Space for additional functions (not for ordinary use)  
i. Space for additional functions (not for ordinary use)  
j. Space for additional functions (not for ordinary use)  
k. Setting the STB length  
l. Setting the input software filter  
m. Setting the application range of calibration  
n. Setting the application range of presetting and mastering  
o. Setting the number of programs to be used (100 pieces or 10 pieces)  
Ready state  
No. 99MBC095A  
4 - 3  
4.1.2 Description of each mode  
1. Data display unit  
If the basic setup mode is entered, the following display appears.  
The basic setup number “ ” will be flashing in the most significant digit of the upper  
display section, and the guidance for the setup item, followed by the setup value, will be  
shown at the right of the setup number.  
In the lower display section “  
” will be displayed.  
Basic setup number: 1 digit  
Setup item guidance: 3 to 8 digits  
Setup data: 1 to 7 digits  
Unit: 2 digits  
PROG  
The set display of "BASIC PROG"  
2. Selecting the basic setup number  
• Each time the  
key is pressed when the basic setup number is flashing the  
function setup number digit changes as follows:  
→
→
→
→
→
→
→
. To enter the desired setup mode press the  
key when its setup number is  
ENT  
flashing. If the  
• If a key other than  
key is pressed, the setup mode will change in reverse order.  
, or is pressed during the selection of a  
,
,
ENT  
SET  
basic setup number an operation error will result.  
• When each piece of setup data is accepted with the  
key in the corresponding  
ENT  
setup mode, the operation will automatically proceed to the next setup item.  
3. Setting each setup item  
• Except for setting up the display latch timer, select the setup item using the  
or  
key and accept the setup specification by pressing the  
key. When the setup  
ENT  
content is accepted, the operation will automatically proceed to the next setup item. In  
setting the display latch timer, it is better to use the numeric keys rather than the arrow  
keys, which, however, are valid.  
4. Confirming the setup contents of each setup item  
To confirm the setup specification of each setup item use only the  
not affect the setup specifications.  
key, which does  
ENT  
5. Terminating the basic setup mode  
• If the  
key is pressed while the basic setup number is flashing, the setup contents  
SET  
modified in this session will be saved, and the system will restore the state that is  
entered just after the power is turned on.  
• If the  
key is pressed in the setup mode of each setup item, the operation returns  
SET  
to the selection of a basic setup number. If the  
key is pressed again at this point ,  
SET  
the setup contents modified in this session will be saved, and the system will restore the  
state that is entered just after the power is turned on.  
• If the power is turned off halfway the setup operation, setup specifications made will  
not be saved. If this is the case, setup should be repeated from the beginning.  
4 - 4  
No. 99MBC095A  
4. SETTING UP THE MEASURING CONDITIONS  
4.1.2.1 Selecting and setting the function in the B0 mode  
a. Setting the resolution (Guidance:  
)
Set the resolution of the Measuring Unit. The resolutions that can be set for the Measuring  
Units are given in “Table 4.5.2.1A” and “Table 4.5.2.1B”.  
Step 1: Each time the  
key is pressed the displayed  
PROG  
setup option (number) changes in the following  
order:  
→
→
... →  
→
→
ENT  
. If the  
key. If  
desired option is flashing, press the  
the resolution setting has been made, the operation  
automatically proceeds to the setting for the  
number of blanked out digits.  
The initial setup option is set to  
.
1. Resolution using the metric system (Unit: µm) Table 4.5.2.1A  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Model name  
LSM-500S  
LSM-501S  
LSM-503S  
LSM-506S  
LSM-512S  
LSM-516S  
0.01  
0.02  
0.05  
0.1  
0.1  
0.2  
0.5  
1
0.2  
0.2  
0.5  
1
0.5  
0.5  
1
1
10  
0.01  
0.02  
0.05  
0.1  
0.02  
0.05  
0.1  
0.05  
0.1  
0.2  
0.5  
0.5  
1
10  
10  
10  
10  
10  
100  
100  
100  
100  
2
0.2  
2
5
0.1  
0.2  
1
2
5
2. Resolution using the inch system (Unit: inch)  
Table 4.5.2.1B  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Model name  
LSM-500S  
LSM-501S  
LSM-503S  
LSM-506S  
LSM-512S  
LSM-516S  
.000001 .000001 .000002 .000005 .00001  
.000001 .000001 .000002 .000005 .00001  
.00002  
.00002  
.00005  
.0001  
.0002  
.0002  
.00005  
.00005  
.0005  
.0005  
.0005  
.0005  
.0005  
.0005  
.005  
.005  
.005  
.005  
.000001 .000002 .000005 .00001  
.00002  
.00005  
.0001  
.000002 .000005 .00001  
.00002  
.00005  
.00005  
.000005 .00001  
.000005 .00001  
.00002  
.00002  
.0001  
Note 1: The shaded figures show the default setting of each Measuring Unit.  
Note 2: Resolutions in the columns of " 0" show those which can be obtained from 32 scans.  
Resolutions in the columns with " 1" show those which can be obtained from 16 scans.  
Note 3: If the number of scans are set between 1 to 8, the least significant digit of a measurement  
will be automatically blanked out where resolution is set to No.0, 1, or 2.  
Note 4: Note that setting a too large resolution may often reduce the measuring accuracy.  
Where the displayed digits are closely intact and difficult to see, set the number of  
blank-out digits or mark the thousandth digit function in the basic setup mode: b0.  
IMPORTANT Changing the resolution will cancel all the clibration values (HIGH CAL and LOW  
CAL), offset value, mastering, abnormal value eliminating limits, GO/NG judgment  
criteria, reference value, and setup values for the automatic workpiece detection.  
Therefore, changing of the resolution should be carried out first.  
No. 99MBC095A  
4 - 5  
b. Setting the number of blank-out digits (Guidance:  
)
Here, set the number of blank-out digits for measurements to be displayed in the display  
unit. This blank out does not apply to the output to BCD interface, RS-232C/GP-IB  
interface, printer, Digimatic output unit, and the display of setup value.  
: No blank out (all digits are displayed)  
: The least significant digit is blanked out.  
: The least significant two digits are blanked out.  
(Default setting is .)  
→
→
→
Step 1: Each time the  
key is pressed the displayed  
PROG  
figure changes in ascending order:  
→
→
→
.
While the figure to be set is flashing, press the  
key.  
ENT  
After accepting the specified value, the display proceeds to the setup stage of the  
next item.  
c. Putting a comma after the thousandths digit (Guidance:  
)
Set whether a comma ( ,) is inserted after the thousandths digit.  
: Not displayed  
: Displayed  
→
→
(Default setting is  
.)  
Step 1: Each time the  
string toggles between  
Select the setting and press the  
key is pressed the displayed  
PROG  
and  
.
key.  
ENT  
After accepting the specified digit position, the  
display proceeds to the setting the buzzer function.  
4 - 6  
No. 99MBC095A  
4. SETTING UP THE MEASURING CONDITIONS  
d. Setting the buzzer function (Guidance:  
)
Set whether or not to enable (key input sensing sound and key entry error sound) and  
(±NG judgment sound). Note that the system error sounds (indicating that the printer or  
Digimatic Output Unit is not connected, or other system failures) are not disabled with this  
setting.  
The types of buzzer sound are as follows:  
1. Key input sensing sound: very short beep (0.05 sec)  
2. Key entry error sound: short beep (0.2 sec)  
3. ±NG judgment sound: long beep (1 sec)  
4. System error sound: repeated short beeps at intervals of 0.2 seconds  
: Sounds a buzzer in all cases.  
: Enables the key input sensing sound + key entry error sound  
: Sounds a buzzer when the judgment result is ±NG  
: Sounds a buzzer only if a system error occurs  
(Default setting:  
)
Step 1: Each time the  
setup option changes in the following order:  
. If the  
key.  
key is pressed the displayed  
PROG  
→
→
→
desired option is flashing, press the  
ENT  
When the setup for the buzzer function is com-  
pleted, operation automatically proceeds to the  
setting of the display latch timer.  
e. Setting the display latch timer (Guidance:  
)
Set the period the measurement result display is to be latched (held) on the display if a  
single-run measurement or continuous-run measurement is performed. Specify a value  
between 0 and 99 seconds. “0” seconds specifies an infinite (latch state not canceled).  
(Default setting: 10 seconds)  
Step 1: This is an example of the display latch timer being  
set to 15 seconds.  
PROG  
Enter  
and  
in this order.  
1
5
PROG  
PROG  
PROG  
1
5
Step 2: Press the  
key to save the setup data in  
ENT  
ENT  
memory.  
The operation automatically proceeds to B1:  
Setting the output function in the ready state.  
No. 99MBC095A  
4 - 7  
4.1.2.2 Selecting and setting the function in the B1 mode  
a. Setting the output function in the ready state (Guidance:  
)
Set whether to perform GO/NG judgment result output and analog output in the ready  
state.  
: Neither kind of output is performed in the ready state.  
: Both kinds of output are performed, even in the ready state.  
(Default setting:  
)
Step 1: Each time the  
setup option toggles between  
While the desired setup option is flashing, press  
the key. When the setup for this function  
key is pressed the displayed  
PROG  
and  
.
ENT  
has been completed, the operation automatically  
proceeds to the setting for the analog output  
voltage in the event of Err-0.  
b. Setting the analog output voltage if Err-0 occurs (Guidance:  
)
Set the analog output voltage in the event of Err-0 (specified workpiece not present).  
: Output voltage 0V  
: Output voltage +5V  
: Output voltage -5V  
(Default setting:  
V)  
Step 1: Each time the  
key is pressed the displayed  
PROG  
setup option changes in the following order:  
. While the desired setup option is  
flashing, press the key. When the setup for  
→
→
ENT  
this function has been completed, the operation  
automatically proceeds to the selection of the  
display message for Err-0.  
c. Selecting the display message if Err-0 occurs (Guidance:  
: Displays “ ”.  
: Displays “ ” as the least significant digit.  
(Default setting:  
)
)
Step 1: Each time the  
setup option toggles between  
While the desired setup option is flashing, press  
the key. The operation automatically  
key is pressed the displayed  
PROG  
and  
.
ENT  
proceeds to the selection of the display message at  
the start of measurement.  
4 - 8  
No. 99MBC095A  
4. SETTING UP THE MEASURING CONDITIONS  
d. Selecting the display message at the start of measurement (Guidance:  
)
Set the message to be displayed at the start of a single-run measurement or continuous-run  
measurement.  
: Displays “  
: Continuously displays the previous data.  
(Default setting:  
”.  
)
Step 1: Each time the  
setup option toggles between  
. While the desired setup option is  
flashing, press the key. The operation  
key is pressed the displayed  
PROG  
and  
ENT  
automatically proceeds to the selection of the  
averaging method.  
e. Selecting the averaging method (Guidance:  
)
Select one of the following averaging methods: arithmetical average and moving average.  
: Arithmetical average  
: Moving average  
(Default setting:  
)
Step 1: Each time the  
key is pressed the displayed  
PROG  
setup option toggles between  
and  
. While the desired setup option is  
flashing, press the  
key. The operation  
ENT  
automatically proceeds to the selection of the GO/  
NG judgment method.  
f. Setting the GO/NG judgment method (Guidance:  
)
Select one of the following GO/NG judgment methods: (lower limit value and upper limit  
value), (multi-limit selection: 7 stages), and (target value + tolerance).  
: GO/NG judgment is performed according to the specified lower limit and  
upper limit.  
: GO/NG judgment is performed according to the multi-limit selection (7  
limits).  
: GO/NG judgment is performed according to the specified target value and  
tolerance.  
(Default setting:  
)
Step 1: Each time the  
setup option changes in the following order:  
. While  
the desired setup option is flashing, press the  
key. If is selected, operation  
proceeds to setting whether the target value is  
key is pressed the displayed  
PROG  
→
→
ENT  
copied to the reference value. If  
selected, operation proceeds to B2: Setting the  
workpiece type.  
is not  
No. 99MBC095A  
4 - 9  
g. Setting whether the target value is copied to the reference value (Guidance:  
Set whether the target value is automatically copied to the reference value.  
: Target value is not copied to the reference value.  
)
: Target value is copied to the reference value.  
(Default setting:  
)
Step 1: Each time  
key is pressed the displayed  
PROG  
setup option toggles between  
and  
. While the desired setup option is  
flashing press  
key. The operation automati-  
ENT  
cally proceeds to setting B2: Setting the  
workpiece type.  
4 - 10  
No. 99MBC095A  
4. SETTING UP THE MEASURING CONDITIONS  
4.1.2.3 Selecting and setting the function in the B2 mode  
a. Setting the workpiece type (Guidance:  
)
Set whether the workpiece is an opaque object or transparent object.  
: Workpiece is an opaque object.  
: Workpiece is a transparent object.  
(Default setting:  
)
Step 1: Each time the  
setup option toggles between  
. While the desired setup option is  
flashing, press the key. The operation  
key is pressed the displayed  
PROG  
and  
ENT  
automatically proceeds to setting whether to  
perform ultra-fine wire measurement.  
TIP If  
is selected for the workpiece type, the guidance for the selection of the  
segment specification method is not displayed. It is omitted (the segment specifica-  
tion process is entered directly).  
b. Setting whether to perform ultra-fine wire measurement (Guidance:  
Set whether to perform the ultra-fine wire measurement.  
: Performs ultra-fine wire measurement.  
)
: Does not perform ultra-fine wire measurement.  
(Default setting:  
on the LSM-500S and other models that have been  
factory set for extra-fine wire measurement; otherwise no setup guidance will  
be displayed).  
Step 1: Each time the  
setup option toggles between  
. While the desired setup option is  
flashing, press the key. If is  
key is pressed the displayed  
PROG  
and  
ENT  
selected, the operation automatically proceeds to  
B3: Setting abnormal value elimination function.  
Otherwise, proceeds to Setting the simultaneous  
measurement.  
NOTE About ultra-fine wire measurement  
1. If the Display Unit is initialized (turn on the power while holding down the  
C
key) on the LSM-500S, the  
comes the default setting.  
option for ultra-fine wire measurement be-  
2. If  
is selected on the LSM-500S so that ultra-fine wire measurement is not  
performed, the following measuring range will be applied.  
Standard (factory)  
set measuring range  
if ultra-fine wire measurement  
is not to be performed  
Measuring range  
LSM-500S  
0.005 to 2 mm  
0.1 to 2 mm  
No. 99MBC095A  
4 - 11  
TIP If  
is selected to perform ultra-fine wire measurement, setup guidance for the  
following will not be displayed: Setting the simultaneous measurement, setting the  
dual-measurement, segment setting, setting the automatic workpiece detection  
function, and group judgment.  
c. Setting the simultaneous measurement (Guidance:  
)
Set whether to perform simultaneous measurement.  
: Does not perform simultaneous measurement. (performs single measure-  
ment)  
: Performs simultaneous measurement.  
(Default setting:  
)
Step 1: Each time the  
setup option toggles between  
While the desired setup option is  
key is pressed the displayed  
PROG  
and  
flashing, press the  
key. Operation automati-  
ENT  
cally proceeds to setting the dual-unit measure-  
ment.  
TIP If  
(simultaneous measurement) is selected  
If simultaneous measurement is selected, the setup guidance for the following will  
not be displayed: Selecting the averaging method, segment specification, and setting  
the group judgment.  
d. Setting the dual-unit measurement (Guidance:  
Set whether to perform dual-unit measurement.  
: Uses DW-type setup.  
)
: Uses DXY-type setup.  
: Uses DF-type setup.  
: Suspends operation of a Measuring Unit.  
(Default setting:  
)
Step 1: Each time the  
setup option changes in the following order:  
. While the desired  
setup option is flashing, press the key.  
key is pressed the displayed  
PROG  
→
→
→
ENT  
If  
process for setting the calculation method for the  
DXY-type; if or is selected, the  
operation enters the setup process for segment  
specification; if is selected, the operation  
is selected, the operation enters the  
enters the process for setting the abnormal value  
elimination function.  
4 - 12  
No. 99MBC095A  
4. SETTING UP THE MEASURING CONDITIONS  
e. Setting the DXY-type calculation (Guidance:  
)
Set the method for calculating the measurements obtained from two Measuring Units.  
: Calculates a sum, (X+Y).  
: Calculates a mean, (X+Y) /2.  
: Calculates a difference, (X-Y).  
: Calculates half of the difference, (X-Y) /2.  
(Default setting:  
)
Step 1: Each time the  
key is pressed the displayed  
PROG  
setup option changes in the following order:  
→
→
→
. While the desired setup option is  
flashing, press the key. The operation  
ENT  
automatically proceeds to B3: Setting the abnor-  
mal value elimination function.  
f. Selecting the method of specifying segments (Guidance:  
)
Select the method of specifying the measurement position from segment specification and  
edge specification.  
: Uses segment specification.  
: Uses edge specification.  
(Default setting:  
)
Step 1: Each time the  
setup option toggles between  
. While the desired setup option is  
flashing, press the key. The operation  
key is pressed the displayed  
PROG  
and  
ENT  
automatically enters B3: Setting the abnormal  
value elimination function.  
NOTE If any of the following setting is performed, the system automatically proceeds to the  
stage of segment setup  
without displaying the guidance for the  
method of specifying segments SEG:  
1. a.  
2. b.  
3. d.  
is selected in Setting the workpiece type.  
is selected in setting whether to perform ultra-fine wire measurement.  
is selected in setting the dual-unit measurement  
or  
No. 99MBC095A  
4 - 13  
4.1.2.4 Selecting and setting the function in the B3 mode  
a. Setting the abnormal value elimination function (Guidance:  
)
Set whether to use the abnormal value elimination function.  
: Does not use the abnormal value elimination function.  
: Use the abnormal value elimination function.  
If the number of samples has been set, measurement will be finished when the  
measured data within the limit value are obtained for the specified sample  
number, and calculation is performed only with the within-the-limit data for  
displaying the measurement result.  
: Use the abnormal value elimination function.  
If the number of samples has been set, measurement will be performed for the  
specified sample number and displays the measurement result after a calcula-  
tion has been performed only with the within-the-limit data. The message  
“Err-0” will be displayed if no data is obtained within the limit value.  
(Default setting:  
)
Step 1: Each time the  
key is pressed the displayed  
PROG  
setup option changes in following order :  
→
→
.
While the desired setup option is flashing, press  
the key. The operation automatically enters  
ENT  
the process for setting the automatic workpiece  
detecting function.  
b. Setting the automatic workpiece detecting function (Guidance:  
Set whether to use the automatic workpiece detecting function.  
: Does not use the automatic workpiece detecting function.  
)
: Performs automatic workpiece detection with the diameter detection  
method.  
: Performs automatic workpiece detection with the position detection  
method.  
(Default setting:  
)
Step 1: Each time the  
setup option changes in the following order:  
. While the  
desired setup option is flashing, press the  
key is pressed the displayed  
PROG  
→
→
ENT  
key. If  
(the automatic workpiece  
detecting function is not used) is selected, the  
operation proceeds to setting the group judgment,  
otherwise it enters the process for setting the  
number of scans.  
4 - 14  
No. 99MBC095A  
4. SETTING UP THE MEASURING CONDITIONS  
c. Setting the number of scans (Guidance:  
)
Set the number of scans that are used for the automatic workpiece detecting function.  
: Detection from 16 scans  
: Detection from a single scan  
(Default setting:  
)
Step 1: Each time the  
key is pressed the displayed  
PROG  
setup option toggles between  
the desired setup option is flashing, press the  
key. The operation automatically enters the  
and . While  
ENT  
process for setting the group judgment.  
NOTE Even if 16 scans are specified in the position detection method, the actual detecting  
operation will be performed with a single scan.  
d. Setting the group judgment (Guidance:  
)
Set whether to use the group judgment function.  
: Does not use the group judgment function.  
: Uses the group judgment function.  
(Default setting:  
)
Step 1: Each time the  
setup option toggles between  
While the desired setup option is flashing, press  
the key. If is selected, the opera-  
tion proceeds to B4: Setting the use of RS-232C  
baud rate, and if is selected, the operation  
key is pressed the displayed  
PROG  
and  
.
ENT  
enters the process for setting the group judgment  
result output function.  
e. Setting the group judgement output (Guidance:  
)
Set whether to output the group judgment result to the RS-232C/GP-IB interface.  
: Does not output the group judgment result to the RS-232C/GP-IB interface.  
: Outputs the group judgment result to the RS-232C/GP-IB interface.  
(Default setting:  
)
Step 1: Each time the  
setup option toggles between  
While the desired setup option is flashing, press  
the key. The operation automatically  
key is pressed the displayed  
PROG  
and  
.
ENT  
proceeds to B4: Setting the use of RS-232C port.  
No. 99MBC095A  
4 - 15  
f. Setting the odd-numbered-edge cutting tool measurement function (Guidance :  
Set whether the odd-numbered-edge cutting tool measurement function is used.  
: Does not use the odd-numbered-edge cutting tool measurement function.  
: Uses the odd-numbered-edge cutting tool measurement function.  
)
This must be selected when the reference edge is located at the Segment 1 side.  
: Uses the odd-numbered-edge cutting tool measurement function.  
This must be selected when the reference edge is located at the Segment 3 side.  
(Initial setting :  
)
Step 1 : Each time the  
key is pressed, the selection  
PROG  
item will change sequentially as follows:  
Step 2 : If the key is pressed while the target  
ENT  
selection item is blinking, the current setup is  
accepted and the operation will automatically  
proceed to B4: Setting the RS-232C port.  
NOTE If one of the following setup items are selected, “  
: Does not use the odd-  
numbered-edge cutting tool measurement function” will be automatically accepted as  
the intended setting without showing the setup guidance for odd-numbered-edge  
cutting tool measurement.  
1. Where “  
method”.  
: Moving average” is set for the “B1.e. Setting the averaging  
2. Where “  
: Ultra-fine wire measurement” is set for the “B2.b. Setting  
whether the Ultra-fine wire measurement is performed”.  
3. Where “  
: Simultaneous measurement” is set for the “B2.c. Setting the  
simultaneous measurement”.  
4. Where “  
5. Where “  
,
, or  
” is set for the “B2.d. Setting the dual measurement”.  
: Edge specification” is set for the “B2.f. Selecting the segment  
specification method”.  
6. Where “ or  
matic detection”.  
” is set for the “B3.b. Setting the workpiece auto-  
TIP For practical measurement examples refer to Section 5.3.6 “Application of the odd-  
numbered-edge cutting tool measurement”.  
4 - 16  
No. 99MBC095A  
4. SETTING UP THE MEASURING CONDITIONS  
4.1.2.5 Selecting and setting the function in the B4 mode  
a. Setting the use of RS-232C port (Guidance:  
)
Set if the RS-232C port is used as the communication port (COM) for a personal com-  
puter, etc., or as the printer port, or is not used for either.  
Except for use as the communication port (COM), the GP-IB interface can take the place  
of the RS-232C.  
: Used as the communication port (COM) for a personal computer, etc.  
: Used as the printer port (GP-IB can be used)  
: Is not used for either purpose (GP-IB can be used)  
(Default setting:  
)
Step 1: Each time the  
setup option changes in the following order:  
. While the desired  
setup option is flashing, press the key. If  
key is pressed the displayed  
PROG  
→
→
ENT  
is selected, the operation proceeds to B5:  
Setting the RUN input function from the I/O  
interface, otherwise it enters the process for  
setting the RS-232C communication speed.  
b. Setting the RS-232C communication baud rate (Guidance:  
Set the RS-232C communication speed (baud rate).  
: Uses 9600 bps.  
)
: Uses 19200 bps.  
: Uses 38400 bps.  
: Uses 4800 bps.  
(Default setting:  
)
Step 1: Each time the  
key is pressed the displayed  
PROG  
setup option changes in the following order:  
→
→
→
. While the desired setup option is  
flashing, press the key. The operation  
ENT  
automatically enters the process for setting the  
RS-232C data bits.  
c. Setting the RS-232C communication data bits (Guidance:  
Set the data bits for RS-232C communication.  
: Uses 8 bits.  
)
: Uses 7 bits.  
(Default setting:  
)
Step 1: Each time the  
key is pressed the displayed  
and  
While the desired setup option is flashing, press  
the key. The operation automatically enters  
PROG  
setup option toggles between  
.
ENT  
the process for setting the parity check method for  
RS-232C communication.  
No. 99MBC095A  
4 - 17  
d. Setting the RS-232C communication parity bit (Guidance:  
Set the parity check method for RS-232C communication.  
: Does not use parity check.  
)
: Uses odd parity.  
: Uses even parity.  
(Default setting:  
)
Step 1: Each time the  
setup option changes in the following order:  
. While the  
desired setup option is flashing, press the  
key is pressed the displayed  
PROG  
→
→
ENT  
key. The operation automatically enters the  
process for setting the delimiter for RS-232C  
communication .  
e. Setting the delimiter for communication (Guidance  
)
Set the delimiter (termination code of one sentence) for RS-232C communication.  
: Uses CR+LF as the delimiter.  
: Uses CR code as the delimiter.  
: Uses LF code as the delimiter.  
(Default setting:  
)
Step 1: Each time the  
setup option changes in the following order:  
. While the desired  
setup option is flashing, press the key. The  
key is pressed the displayed  
PROG  
→
→
ENT  
operation automatically enters the process for  
setting the control method of the RS-232C  
communication flow.  
f. Setting the RS-232C line control (Guidance:  
)
Set the method of controlling the RS-232C communication flow.  
: Does not use a particular control signal (using 3-wire teletype control).  
: Uses a control signal.  
(Default setting:  
)
Note: If the RS-232C interface is set as the printer port, line control will be  
achieved by BUSY signals even if this option was set to  
.
Step 1: Each time the  
setup option toggles between  
While the desired setup option is flashing, press  
the key. The operation automatically  
key is pressed the displayed  
PROG  
and  
.
ENT  
proceeds to B5: Setting the RUN input function  
from the I/O interface.  
4 - 18  
No. 99MBC095A  
4. SETTING UP THE MEASURING CONDITIONS  
4.1.2.6 Selecting and setting the function in the B5 mode  
a. Setting the RUN input function from the I/O interface (Guidance:  
)
Set if the RUN input from the I/O interface is used to trigger single-run measurement,  
continuous-run measurement with a term specification, or continuous-run measurement. If  
the function is used for triggering continuous-run measurement with a term specification,  
RUN input from the Second Analog I/O Interface will also be used for triggering the same  
kind of measurement.  
: Used to trigger single-run measurement.  
: Used to trigger continuous-run measurement with a term specification  
: Used to trigger continuous-run measurement.  
(Default setting:  
)
Step 1: Each time the  
setup option changes in the following order:  
. While  
the desired setup option is flashing, press the  
key. The operation automatically enters the  
key is pressed the displayed  
PROG  
→
→
ENT  
process for setting the OFFS input function from  
the Analog I/O Interface.  
b. Setting the PSET input function from the I/O interface (Guidance:  
)
Set whether the PSET input from the Analog I/O Interface is used for enabling the preset  
function or holding the displayed value (while this signal is on, neither the GO/NG  
judgment result nor the analog output value is updated). If the function for holding the  
displayed value is selected, SHIFT + RUN input from the Second Analog Interface is also  
treated as being the same function.  
: Uses the input signal to enable the preset function.  
: Uses the input signal to hold the value.  
(Default setting:  
)
Step 1: Each time the  
setup option toggles between  
. While the desired setup option is  
flashing, press the key. The operation  
key is pressed the displayed  
PROG  
and  
ENT  
proceeds to B6: Setting the use of DCU if the  
Second Analog I/O interface is installed. Other-  
wise the operation proceeds to the Setting the GO  
output function from the I/O interface.  
No. 99MBC095A  
4 - 19  
c. Setting the GO output function from the I/O interface (Guidance:  
)
Set whether the GO output from the Analog I/O Interface is used as GO, STB (strobe), or  
ACK (acknowledgment). This selection does not apply to the Second Analog I/O Inter-  
face, since it has its specific output port. For information about each signal, refer to  
Section 6.1.1, “I/O Analog Interface”.  
: Used as a GO output.  
: Used as a STB output.  
: Used as an ACK output.  
(Default setting:  
)
Step 1: Each time the  
key is pressed the displayed  
PROG  
setup option changes in the following order:  
. While the desired setup  
option is flashing, press the key. The  
→
→
ENT  
operation automatically proceeds to B6: Setting  
the use of DCU.  
NOTE If the Second Analog I/O Interface Unit is used  
The Second Analog I/O Interface Unit, if installed, will also perform the function of  
the standard analog I/O interface unit except the analog output through the I/O port.  
4.1.2.7 Selecting and setting the function in the B6 mode  
a. Setting the use of DCU (Guidance:  
)
Set whether to use the Mitutoyo DP-series Data Processing Unit called DCU (Digimatic  
Output Unit).  
The setup guidance for this option will be displayed only if the dedicated interface has  
been installed.  
: Does not use DCU.  
: Only uses the OUTPUT-1 interface from the two interface units.  
: Uses both interface units.  
(Default setting:  
)
Step 1: Each time the  
setup option changes in the following order:  
. While the  
desired setup option is flashing, press the  
key is pressed the displayed  
PROG  
→
→
ENT  
key. The operation automatically returns to B0:  
Setting the resolution.  
NOTE About the setting of a DCU  
If is specified so two interfaces are used for single measurement, the  
OUTPUT-2 will be ignored.  
4 - 20  
No. 99MBC095A  
4. SETTING UP THE MEASURING CONDITIONS  
4.1.2.8 Setting in the B7 mode (expanded items)  
To use this mode, turn on the power while pressing the  
key. Items in this mode will be  
9
displayed for selection after the display of the basic setup items in the B6 mode.  
IMPORTANT • If expanded items (of the mode of B7) that are not required are displayed, cancel  
the display by setting  
• For setting in the space for additional function always select  
default or . If this setting is carelessly modified, this Unit will operate  
unexpectedly such as to disable any measurement.  
in place of  
for the expanded item setup.  
which is the  
a. Setting expanded items (Guidance:  
)
Set whether to use (display) the function of expanded items.  
: No use (display) of the expanded item  
: Use (display) of the expanded item  
(Default setting:  
)
Step 1: Setting changes between  
and  
at  
PROG  
each entry of  
Step 2: Press the  
.
key while the setting is flashing.  
ENT  
When this entry is made, the next setting item will  
be displayed.  
b. Reservation (Guidance:  
(Default setting:  
)
)
)
)
PROG  
PROG  
PROG  
c. Reservation (Guidance:  
(Default setting:  
)
d. Reservation (Guidance:  
(Default setting:  
)
e. SHL setting (Guidance:  
)
Sets up the SHL value for the measurement of, for  
example, the transparent sheet width. To use this  
function, set  
for "a. Expanded item" and  
for "g. Setting measurement mode". For detailed  
information about this setting, refer to Section 3.2.4.1,  
"Transparent object".  
Be aware that any change in the parameter setting greatly affects the measured data  
(measuring accuracy).  
(Default value:  
(%))  
Setting value is an integer between 5% and 95%.  
No. 99MBC095A  
4 - 21  
Step 1: Enter a value with numeral keys while the setting  
is flashing.  
PROG  
Step 2: Press the  
key while an entered value is  
ENT  
flashing. After the entry is made, the next setting  
item will be displayed.  
f. Setting for detecting dirty protection glass (Guidance:  
)
Sets the function for detecting dirty protection glass. (Functions at power on.)  
If the protection glass is dirty, will be displayed. This error display can be  
cleared by pressing the key. The ready state will be entered.  
C
If the protection glass is found to be dirty, refer to Section 8.2, "Measuring Unit".  
A warning will be issued if the protection glass has become too dirty and measuring  
accuracy will be affected. To ensure precision measurements, clean the protection glass  
before any warning is likely to be issued.  
: No use of the dirty protection glass detection function.  
: Use of the dirty protection glass detection function.  
(Default value:  
)
Step 1: Setting changes between  
and  
at  
PROG  
each entry of  
Step 2: Press the  
.
key while the setting is flashing.  
ENT  
After the entry is made, the next item to be set  
will be displayed.  
NOTE A very small workpiece (e.g., smaller than 0.05 mm for the LSM-500S) is likely to be  
regarded as a piece of dirt. If a very small workpiece is to be measured, perform a  
check with the workpiece removed.  
g. Setting the measurement mode (Guidance:  
)
Used to select measurement mode for measurement of, for example, the transparent sheet  
width. For detailed information, refer to Section 3.2.4.1 Transparent object.  
Be aware that any change in the parameter setting greatly affects the measured data  
(measuring accuracy).  
: Use this setting for ordinary measurements.  
: Do not use this setting for ordinary measurements.  
: Only select for changing the SHL settings.  
(Default value:  
)
Step 1: Setting changes to  
,
, and  
.
in  
PROG  
this sequence for each entry of  
Step 2: Press the  
key while the setting is flashing.  
ENT  
After this entry is made, the next item to be set  
will be displayed.  
4 - 22  
No. 99MBC095A  
4. SETTING UP THE MEASURING CONDITIONS  
h. Space for additional functions (Guidance:  
(Initial setting :  
If the is entered, the operation automatically  
)
PROG  
PROG  
PROG  
)
ENT  
proceeds to the next setting.  
i. Space for additional functions (Guidance:  
)
(Initial setting :  
)
If the is entered, the operation automatically  
ENT  
proceeds to the next setting.  
j. Space for additional functions (Guidance:  
)
(Initial setting :  
)
If the is entered, the operation automatically  
ENT  
proceeds to the next setting.  
k. Setting the STB length of I/O analog interface (Guidance:  
)
Selects the STB length of the I/O Analog Interface (strobe) output.  
: Automatically makes up the setting with the specified number of averages.  
: STB length = 0.1 ms  
: STB length = 0.3 ms  
: STB length = 2 ms  
: STB length = 5 ms  
: STB length = 10 ms  
: STB length = 20 ms  
: STB length = 50 ms  
: STB length = 100 ms  
(Initial setting:  
Step 1: Each time the  
item will change sequentially as follows:  
→ ... →  
)
key is pressed, the selection  
PROG  
→
→
Step 2: If the  
key is pressed while the target  
ENT  
selection item is blinking, the current setup is  
accepted and the operation will automatically  
proceed to the next setting.  
l. Setting the input software filter (Guidance:  
Select the filter length for input signals.  
: Filter length = 5 ms  
)
: Filter length = 20 ms  
: Filter length = 2 ms  
(Initial setting:  
)
Step 1: Each time the  
key is pressed, the selection  
PROG  
item will change sequentially as follows:  
→
→
Step 2: If the  
key is pressed while the target  
ENT  
selection item is blinking, the current setup is  
accepted and the operation will automatically  
proceed to the next setting.  
No. 99MBC095A  
4 - 23  
m. Setting the application range of calibration (Guidance:  
)
Select the range of applying the calibration from “All programs” and “For each channel”.  
: Applies uniformly to the entire programs.  
: Applies individually to each channel (for every 10 program).  
(Initial setting:  
)
Step 1: Each time the  
key is pressed, the selection  
PROG  
item will change sequentially as follows:  
→
ENT  
Step 2: If the  
key is pressed while the target  
selection item is blinking, the current setup is  
accepted and the operation will automatically  
proceed to the next setting.  
NOTE When  
is selected, any programs corresponding to the channel number other  
than the one on which the calibration has been performed will take the settings at  
shipment, i.e. without being calibrated.  
n. Setting the application range of presetting and mastering (Guidance:  
)
Select the range of applying the presetting and mastering from “For each program”, “All  
programs”, and “For each channel”.  
: Applies individually to each program.  
: Applies uniformly to the entire programs.  
: Applies individually to each channel (for every 10 program).  
(Initial setting:  
)
Step 1: Each time the  
key is pressed, the selection  
PROG  
item will change sequentially as follows:  
→
ENT  
→
Step 2: If the  
key is pressed while the target  
selection item is blinking, the current setup is  
accepted and the operation will automatically  
proceed to the next setting.  
o. Setting the number of programs to be used (Guidance:  
)
Select the number of programs to be used from “100” and “10”.  
: 100 program mode  
: 10 program mode  
(Initial setting:  
)
Step 1: Each time the  
key is pressed, the selection  
PROG  
item will change sequentially as follows:  
→
ENT  
Step 2: If the  
key is pressed while the target  
selection item is blinking, the current setup is  
accepted and the operation will automatically  
proceed to the next setting.  
4 - 24  
No. 99MBC095A  
4. SETTING UP THE MEASURING CONDITIONS  
4.2 Calibration  
The LSM system can be calibrated quite easily and with high accuracy.  
4.2.1 Calibration gages and gage stand  
Supported calibration gages and gage stand have the following shapes.  
With-holder type  
Straight type  
Stepped type  
Calibration gages and stand  
Gage stand  
4.2.2 Entering the calibration mode  
Enter the calibration mode with the following procedure.  
< Preparation >  
(1) Turn on the power and wait at least 30 minutes for the system to thermally stabilize.  
(2) Prior to use, wipe dust and oil from the gage and gage stand with a cloth soaked in  
alcohol or thinner. If calibration has been completed, carefully store them in a dedicated  
case after applying a rust preventive oil to their surfaces.  
(3) Specify SEG 2.  
For information about the method of segment specification, refer to Section 4.5, “Setting  
Up the Functions”.  
PROG  
On edge specification, select either manual measurement or automatic measurement with  
respect to diameter.  
PROG  
PROG  
a) Manual measurement  
b) Automatic measurement  
Set the start edge to 2 and the end edge to 3.  
PROG  
PROG  
a) Start edge  
b) End edge  
No. 99MBC095A  
4 - 25  
(4) Setting the HIGH CAL gage.  
HIGH CAL gages vary in shape depending on the LSM model to be calibrated. Set the  
calibration gage so that the calibration guide line ( | ) on the side face of the calibration  
gage comes vertical, and so that the center of the calibrated section is measured.  
In diagram (a), the calibrated position is at the center of the ( | | ) mark, and the center of  
the width (indicated by the arrow mark) in diagram (b).  
(a)  
(b)  
Step 1: Cancel the previously set calibration values.  
It is not necessary if this setup operation is made with the previously used calibration  
gage. However, if the new gage diameter is much different from that of the previous  
one, an error (Err-2) may result. If this is the case, cancel the LOW CAL calibration  
value, then begin with the setting of HIGH CAL value (it does not matter if both the  
LOW CAL and HIGH CAL values are canceled).  
1) Cancel the previous LOW CAL data. Press the  
key in the ready state to initiate the  
PROG  
L.CAL  
LOW CAL setup mode.  
2) Press the and  
keys to  
ENT  
PROG  
PROG  
C
C
cancel the LOW CAL data. This  
automatically restores the ready state.  
ENT  
Step 2: Mount the HIGH CAL gage on the stand.  
PROG  
Press the  
key in the ready state. The  
H.CAL  
previously set HIGH CAL value is displayed, and  
the HIGH CAL setup mode is entered.  
Step 3: Enter the approved dimension of the HIGH CAL  
gage.  
Example.)  
PROG  
.
1
2
2
4
0
0
4 - 26  
No. 99MBC095A  
4. SETTING UP THE MEASURING CONDITIONS  
Step 4: If the  
key is pressed to save the HIGH CAL  
PROG  
ENT  
setup value in memory, the operation automati-  
cally returns to the ready state.  
Step 5: Set the LOW CAL gage.  
As with the HIGH CAL gage, the LOW CAL  
gages vary in shape depending on the LSM model  
to be calibrated. Set the LOW CAL gage so that  
the center of the calibration range is properly  
measured.  
A LOW CAL gage for calibrating dimensions less  
than 2 mm should be set so that it fits with the  
mounting hole of the gage stand.  
Step 6: Set up the LOW CAL gage.  
PROG  
In the ready state press the  
key. The  
L.CAL  
previously set LOW CAL value is displayed, and  
the LOW CAL setup mode is entered.  
Step 7: Enter the verified dimension of the LOW CAL  
gage.  
PROG  
PROG  
.
0
5
1
0
0
Step 8: If the  
key is pressed to save the LOW CAL  
ENT  
setup value in memory, the operation automati-  
cally returns to the ready state.  
4.2.3 Combined calibration  
For DF-type setup, it is possible to perform combined  
calibration with two Measuring Units.  
Segment  
Measuring unit 2  
Measuring unit 1  
5
In the example as shown at the right hand, a workpiece is  
mounted so it extends over two Measuring Units and a  
reference pins are used to improve the measurement  
repeatability.  
1
In this case, a combination of segments (1 + 5) is used.  
The method for setting up the calibration value is the same  
as that used for setting the HIGH CAL or LOW CAL  
gage.  
No. 99MBC095A  
4 - 27  
IMPORTANT Calibration  
1. Before performing a calibration, always perform the necessary setup for the  
resolution and dual-unit measurement. If this order is reversed, the set calibration  
value may be canceled and the measurement accuracy is not guaranteed.  
2. Canceling the HIGH CAL value will also cancel the LOW CAL, offset, and master-  
ing values.  
3. With only a LOW CAL setup value the compensation calculation does not take  
place. This calculation will start when a HIGH CAL (or HIGH CAL and LOW CAL)  
value is set.  
If a HIGH CAL value is set, the CAL guidance ( ) will turn on in the display unit.  
4. A calibration gage is important in that it is critical to the accuracy of the Measuring  
Unit. Wipe dust and oil from the gage with a cloth soaked in alcohol or thinner  
before using it.  
After use, apply a rust preventive oil to its surfaces and store it carefully in a  
dedicated case.  
5. To confirm the HIGH CAL or LOW CAL setup value, press either the  
or  
H.CAL  
key to enter each setup mode, and press the  
(and  
) or  
SET L.CAL  
L.CAL  
H.CAL  
(and  
) key to exit to the ready state after the confirmation is over. Do not  
SET  
perform the setup operation in the confirmation process of the setup data.  
6. On the user-supplied calibration gages, the dimensional ratio of a High CAL gage  
to a Low CAL gage should be greater than 1.2. Calibration performed with the  
calibration gages with diameters that are too close each other may reduce the  
measuring accuracy. The calibration gage should be the one which is made of the  
same or similar material as that of the workpiece. If a calibration gage of different  
material is used, error may be involved in measurement due to the difference in  
surface textures or properties.  
7. For calibration measurement, no restriction exist for segment specification. If a  
gap or displacement needs to be precisely measured, a thickness gage can be  
used for calibration. (There will be a slight difference in measured data between  
those from OD and gap depending on the segment specified for calibration.)  
4 - 28  
No. 99MBC095A  
4. SETTING UP THE MEASURING CONDITIONS  
4.3 Positioning a Gage or a Workpiece  
1. Position the calibration gage or workpiece so that it is located at the middle of the mea-  
surement position.  
The shaded section in the following diagram is the measuring region where the rated  
measuring accuracy of this system is obtained.  
2. The measured data is displayed even if a workpiece or a gage is located outside the  
measuring region, however, the measurement accuracy becomes worse than that of the  
guaranteed measurement accuracy.  
3. Dimensions A, B, C, and D will vary depending on the Measuring Unit used. Refer to the  
specifications and dimensions described in the user’s manual that comes with each  
Measuring Unit.  
A
C
4.4 How to read-in the amount of light  
For measurement of the fine gap where the light passing through it can not be sufficiently  
secured it is necessary for the system to read-in the amount of light. For more information  
refer to Section 3.2.16, “Recording in the amount of light”.  
Step 1: Removal of obstructions  
Remove any objects (workpiece and fixture) that obstruct the laser path before  
reading in the amount of light.  
Step 2: Enter the function setup mode from the ready  
state.  
PROG  
Step 3: Press the  
and  
keys while the function  
READ  
PROG  
SHIFT  
setup number is flashing to enter the light amount  
check mode.  
Each time the  
key is pressed the setup  
option toggles between  
detection) and  
light).  
(automatic  
(reading in the amount of  
Step 4: Press the  
key while  
is flashing.  
PROG  
PROG  
ENT  
If a sufficient amount of light is detected as a  
result of this positive check, the operation auto-  
matically returns to the ready state. If  
is  
displayed, it indicates that the amount of light is  
insufficient. If this is the case, remove any  
obstruction and cancel the error with the  
key, then perform step 4 again.  
C
No. 99MBC095A  
4 - 29  
NOTE • Conduct this operation two to three times a year to prevent a change in light  
intensity from affecting the measurements.  
• Execute this operation as necessary if measurements are significantly affected by  
temperature drift.  
4 - 30  
No. 99MBC095A  
4. SETTING UP THE MEASURING CONDITIONS  
4.5 Setting Up the Functions  
Make measurement-related setups based on the conditions set in Section 4.1 “basic Setup”  
4.5.1 Outline of the function setup mode  
Ready state  
SET  
SET  
SET  
(
)
SET  
Function No.  
F0  
Setup contents  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
F5  
No. 99MBC095A  
4 - 31  
Function No.  
F6  
Setup contents  
F7  
F8  
4.5.2 Outline of each function setup mode  
1. Data display unit  
If the basic setup mode is entered, the following is displayed.  
The function setup number  
will be flashing in the most significant digit of the upper  
display section, and the guidance for the setup item, followed by the setup value, will be  
shown to the right of the setup number.  
In the lower display section the measurement from the foreground program number will be  
displayed.  
Function setup number: 1 digit  
Setup item guidance: 3 to 8 digits  
Setup data: Maximum 10 digits  
Unit: 2 digits  
PROG  
Measurement from the  
foregroundprogram number  
4 - 32  
No. 99MBC095A  
4. SETTING UP THE MEASURING CONDITIONS  
2. Setting each setup item  
• Use the numeric keys for setting the setup value, such as an preset value, and use the  
and  
keys for selecting the item, such as the statistical item of the sample  
measurement.  
• Press the  
key to accept and save the setup data. After the setup content has been  
ENT  
accepted, the operation automatically proceeds to the next setup item.  
3. Setup values that must meet the large/small relationships  
The setup values for GO/NG judgment should meet the following relationships: Abnormal  
lower limit < Abnormal upper limit, Lower tolerance limit < Upper tolerance limit, and  
Lower limit value < Upper limit value.  
If the previously specified setup value needs to be modified to a great extent, it is recom-  
mended to first enter the new setup value thats meets the existing large/small relationship  
or, for safety, cancel the both sides to 0 then set them again.  
4. Confirming the setup contents of each setup item  
To confirm the setup contents of each setup item use only the  
affect the setup contents.  
key, which does not  
ENT  
5. Terminating the function setup mode  
• If the  
key is pressed while the function setup number is flashing, operation  
SET  
returns to the ready state.  
• If the  
key is pressed in the setup mode of each setup item, operation returns to  
SET  
the selection of a function setup number. If the  
operation returns to the ready state.  
key is pressed again at this point,  
SET  
• If the power is turned off halfway to the setup operation, on-going setup contents will  
not be saved in memory. The contents must be set again.  
4.5.3 Function setup mode  
• If the function setup mode is entered using the  
PROG  
SET  
key in the ready state, the function setup number  
will be flashing as shown in the figure at the right.  
• Each time the  
key is pressed when the function  
setup number is flashing, it will change as follows:  
→
→
→
ENT  
→
(
→
→
→
→
→
. Press the  
) key while the desired  
function setup number is flashing to enter the setup  
mode. If the  
reversed.  
key is pressed, this order will be  
• If a key other than the  
selection of a function setup number, an operation error will result.  
• If each piece of setup data is accepted with the key in the corresponding setup  
,
,
,
and  
keys are pressed during the  
ENT  
SET  
ENT  
mode, the operation will automatically proceed to the next setup item.  
No. 99MBC095A  
4 - 33  
4.5.3.1 F0: Setting the segment  
Use this function to set the measurement position (segment). The segment specification and  
edge specification methods are provided for this purpose. Both can be selected in the basic  
setup.  
If this setup mode is entered, the previously established data will flash.  
1) Segment specification  
PROG  
Places for displaying the segment numbers are fixed as  
shown in the figure at the right. In this example, set to  
SEG2.  
Segment  
7 6 5 4 3 2 1  
Step 1: If the segment setup mode is entered, the previ-  
ously established data will be displayed.  
PROG  
Press the  
key.  
PROG  
PROG  
2
2
Step 2: Press the  
key to save the setup data  
ENT  
in memory.  
ENT  
Operation automatically proceeds to the  
measurement interval setting.  
TIP Segment setup example  
1. Set to segments (2 + 4).  
2. Set to segments (1 + 5).  
PROG  
PROG  
4
5
2
1
4 - 34  
No. 99MBC095A  
4. SETTING UP THE MEASURING CONDITIONS  
2) Edge specification  
Step 1: If the edge specification mode is entered, the  
previously established manual measurement/  
automatic measurement item will be displayed.  
PROG  
PROG  
Each time the  
key is pressed the setup  
option changes in the following order:  
Manual measurement:  
→ Automatic  
→ Automatic  
→ Automatic  
. If the desired setup  
key.  
measurement for pitch:  
measurement for diameter:  
measurement for gap:  
option is displayed, press the  
ENT  
Operation automatically enters the process of setting the start edge.  
Step 2: Set the start edge (between number 1 and  
PROG  
254)  
2
In this example, set the start edge to  
number 2.  
If the  
key is pressed, the operation  
ENT  
automatically enters the process for setting  
the finish edge.  
Step 3: Set the end edge (between number 2  
PROG  
and 255)  
5
6
In this example, set the end edge to  
number 65.  
If the  
key is pressed, the operation auto-  
ENT  
matically proceeds to F1: Setting the measurement  
interval.  
TIP 1. If a calibration is performed using the reference gage (placed in SEG2) with the  
edge specification active, select Manual measurement: or Automatic  
measurement for diameter: , then set the start edge to 2 and end edge to 3.  
2. If the checks on the start and end edges, performed at the end of the setup  
operation, result in start edge > end edge, exchange the start and end edge data.  
If the check result shows that both edge numbers are identical, an error (Err-5)  
results. If this occurs, cancel the setup data and begin the setting with the start  
edge.  
No. 99MBC095A  
4 - 35  
4.5.3.2 F1: Setting the measurement interval (measurement time)  
Use this function to set the measurement interval. This measurement interval should be set  
according to the arithmetical average and moving average, whichever is specified in the basic  
setup.  
1) Arithmetical average (Guidance:  
)
Step 1: The previously set number of scans for averaging  
is displayed. Select between 1 and 2048 times .  
The relationship between the number of scans for  
averaging and measurement intervals are shown in  
the table below.  
PROG  
Relationship between the number of scans for averaging and measurement intervals (mea-  
surement times)  
Number of scans for  
averaging  
Measurement intervals (measurement time)  
Arithmetical average Moving average  
2nd and subsequent  
measurements  
1st measurement  
1
2
0.00032 sec  
0.00064 sec  
0.0013 sec  
0.0025 sec  
0.005 sec  
0.01 sec  
–
–
4
–
8
–
16  
–
32  
0.01 sec  
0.02 sec  
0.04 sec  
0.08 sec  
0.16 sec  
0.32 sec  
0.64 sec  
0.05 sec  
0.05 sec  
0.05 sec  
0.05 sec  
0.05 sec  
0.05 sec  
0.05 sec  
64  
0.02 sec  
128  
256  
512  
1024  
2048  
0.04 sec  
0.08 sec  
0.16 sec  
0.32 sec  
0.64 sec  
Each time the  
key is pressed, the setup option changes in the following order:  
→
→
→
→
→
→
→
→
→
→
→
→
. For this example select 1024 times.  
Select 1024 times.  
PROG  
Step 2: Press the  
memory.  
key to save the setup data in  
PROG  
ENT  
ENT  
The operation automatically proceeds to F2:  
Setting the GO/NG judgment criteria.  
4 - 36  
No. 99MBC095A  
4. SETTING UP THE MEASURING CONDITIONS  
2) Moving average (Guidance:  
Different in the setup guidance (  
)
) and the  
PROG  
number of scans for averaging (between 32 and  
2048), however, the setup method is same with  
the arithmetical average.  
NOTE 1. If “Performing ultra-fine wire measurement” is specified in the basic setup, be-  
tween 16 and 2048 times should be selected.  
2. A larger number of scans for averaging will improve the repeatability.  
If measuring time permits, set the greatest number of scans for averaging pos-  
sible.  
3. If the number of scans for averaging is set to between 1 and 4, the scan signals  
will be thinned for the measurement. This results in a measurement interval of  
0.002 to 0.003 second.  
No. 99MBC095A  
4 - 37  
4.5.3.3 F2: Setting the GO/NG judgment criteria  
Set the GO/NG judgment criteria according to the tolerance judgment method: (Lower limit  
value + Upper limit value), (Multi-stage selection: 7 stages), and (Target value + tolerance),  
whichever is specified in the basic setup. If “Using the abnormal value elimination function”  
has been specified, the abnormal limit values should be set prior to setting the GO/NG  
judgment criteria.  
In this example assume that the machining target value is 12.5 +/- 0.01 mm, and that all the  
abnormal limits (lower and upper) and GO/NG judgment criteria are canceled (set to 0).  
1) Setting the abnormal limit values  
Set as follows: Lower abnormal limit = 12.48 mm, Upper abnormal limit = 12.52 mm,  
Abnormal value count = 3.  
Step 1: The previously set lower abnormal limit is  
PROG  
displayed.  
Enter “12.48”.  
PROG  
PROG  
8
1
2
.
4
Step 2: Press the  
key.  
ENT  
The setup data will be saved in memory and  
operation automatically proceeds to the setting for  
the upper abnormal limit.  
Step 3: Enter “12.52”, which is the setup data for the  
upper abnormal limit.  
PROG  
PROG  
2
1
2
.
5
Step 4: Press the  
key.  
ENT  
The setup data will be saved in memory and  
operation automatically proceeds to the abnormal  
value count setting.  
Step 5: Enter “3”, which is the setup data for the  
PROG  
PROG  
3
abnormal value count.  
Step 6: Press the  
key.  
ENT  
The setup data will be saved in memory  
and operation will automatically proceed to  
the GO/NG judgment criteria setting.  
The method of GO/NG judgment varies  
with the contents of the basic setup.  
Case of  
(Lower limit value and Upper limit value)  
PROG  
PROG  
Case of (Multi-stage selection)  
Case of (Target value + tolerance)  
4 - 38  
No. 99MBC095A  
4. SETTING UP THE MEASURING CONDITIONS  
2) GO/NG judgment criteria setting (by “Lower limit value and upper limit value”)  
In this example assume that the lower limit value is 12.49 mm and that the upper limit  
value is 12.51 mm.  
Step 1: The previously set lower limit value is displayed.  
PROG  
Enter “12.49”.  
PROG  
PROG  
9
1
2
.
4
Step 2: Press the  
key.  
ENT  
The setup data will be saved in memory and the  
operation automatically proceeds to the upper  
limit value setting.  
Step 3: Enter “12.51”, which is the setup data for the  
upper limit value.  
PROG  
PROG  
1
1
2
.
5
Step 4: Press the  
key.  
ENT  
The setup data will be saved in memory and the  
operation automatically proceeds to the reference  
value setting.  
No. 99MBC095A  
4 - 39  
3) Setting the GO/NG judgment criteria (by multi-limit selection)  
In this example assume the following:  
L1=12.49mm  
L2=12.494mm  
L3=12.498mm  
L4=12.502mm  
L5=12.506mm  
L6=12.51mm  
Step 1: The previously entered setup value for L1 is  
PROG  
displayed.  
Enter “12.49”.  
PROG  
PROG  
9
1
2
.
4
Step 2: Press the  
key.  
ENT  
The setup data will be saved in memory and the  
operation automatically proceeds to the L2 setting.  
Step 3: Enter “12.494”, which is the setup data for L2.  
PROG  
PROG  
9
4
1
2
.
4
Step 4: Press the  
key.  
ENT  
The setup data will be saved in memory and the  
operation automatically proceeds to the L3 setting.  
Step 5: As with L1 and L2, set L3, L4, and L5.  
Step 6: Enter “12.51”, which is the L6 setup value.  
PROG  
PROG  
PROG  
1
1
2
.
5
Step 7: Press the  
key.  
ENT  
The setup data will be saved in memory and the  
operation automatically proceeds to the reference  
value setting.  
4 - 40  
No. 99MBC095A  
4. SETTING UP THE MEASURING CONDITIONS  
4) Setting the GO/NG judgment criteria (with “Target value + tolerance”)  
In this example assume that the target value is 12.5 mm, lower tolerance is -0.01 mm, and  
upper tolerance is 0.01 mm.  
Step 1: The previously set target value is displayed.  
PROG  
Enter “12.5”.  
PROG  
PROG  
1
2
.
5
Step 2: Press the  
key.  
ENT  
The setup data will be saved in memory and the  
operation automatically proceeds to the lower  
tolerance value setting.  
The target value will be automatically copied on  
the reference value, if so set in the basic setup,  
and if any scale value was not set, it will be set to  
1.  
Step 3: Enter “0.01”, which is the lower tolerance value,  
and a negative sign.  
PROG  
PROG  
(
)
.
0
0
1
+/  
-
Step 4: Press the  
key.  
PROG  
ENT  
The setup data will be saved in memory and the  
operation automatically proceeds to the upper  
tolerance value setting.  
Step 5: Enter “0.01”, which is the upper tolerance value.  
PROG  
PROG  
(
)
.
0
0
1
Step 6: Press the  
key.  
ENT  
The setup data will be saved in memory and the  
operation automatically proceeds to the reference  
value setting.  
The displayed guidance for the setup item will  
vary depending whether “Copying the target value  
to the reference value” has been specified in the  
basic setup.  
When not copying the target value  
to the reference value.  
PROG  
When copying the target value  
to the reference value.  
No. 99MBC095A  
4 - 41  
4.5.3.4 F3: Setting the reference value  
Set the reference value and/or scale value here. If “Copying the target value to the reference  
value” has been specified in the basic setup, the setup guidance for the reference value will  
not be displayed, however, setting the scale value is permitted.  
In this example assume that the reference value is 12.5 mm, and the scale value is 1.  
Step 1: The previously set reference value is displayed.  
PROG  
PROG  
Enter “12.5”.  
If “1” is entered the currently displayed  
setup value changes to “1”, however, it will  
1
not be saved in memory until the  
key is pressed.  
ENT  
Enter “2”.  
PROG  
PROG  
PROG  
2
.
Enter a decimal point (“.”).  
Enter “5”.  
5
Step 2: Press the  
key.  
PROG  
ENT  
The setup data will be saved in memory and the  
operation automatically proceeds to the scale  
value setting.  
For information about the relationship between the  
analog voltage output and scale value, refer to  
Section 4.5.3.5, “Analog voltage output and scale  
value”.  
Enter a scale value of “1”.  
PROG  
PROG  
Step 3: Press the  
key.  
ENT  
The setup data will be saved in memory and the  
operation automatically proceeds to the offset  
value setting.  
4 - 42  
No. 99MBC095A  
4. SETTING UP THE MEASURING CONDITIONS  
4.5.3.5 Analog voltage output and scale value  
The analog voltage output is determined from (Measured data - reference value) x scale value  
(gain), and therefore varies depending on the resolution set on each Measuring Unit, as  
shown in the following table.  
Table 1: Metric units (The upper limit of the analog output must be within the range of actual  
measurements)  
Scale value (1)  
Minimum readout on the display unit  
Number  
0.01µm  
0.02µm  
0.05µm  
0.1µm  
Resolution  
2.5mV/0.01µm  
±5V/20µm  
2.5mV/0.1µm  
±5V/200µm  
2.5mV/1µm  
±5V/2mm  
2.5mV/0.02µm  
±5V/40µm  
2.5mV/0.05µm  
±5V/100µm  
2.5mV/0.5µm  
±5V/1mm  
2.5mV/0.1µm  
±5V/200µm  
2.5mV/1µm  
±5V/2mm  
1
Maximum output  
Resolution  
2.5mV/0.2µm  
±5V/400µm  
2.5mV/2µm  
±5V/4mm  
2
3
Maximum output  
Resolution  
2.5mV/5µm  
±5V/10mm  
2.5mV/10µm  
±5V/20mm  
Maximum output  
Scale value (2)  
Number  
Minimum readout on the display unit  
0.2µm  
0.5µm  
1µm  
2µm  
Resolution  
2.5mV/0.2µm  
±5V/400µm  
2.5mV/2µm  
±5V/4mm  
2.5mV/0.5µm  
±5V/1mm  
2.5mV/1µm  
±5V/2mm  
2.5mV/2µm  
±5V/4mm  
2.5mV/20µm  
±5V/40mm  
2.5mV/200µm  
1
2
Maximum output  
Resolution  
2.5mV/5µm  
±5V/10mm  
2.5mV/50µm  
2.5mV/10µm  
±5V/20mm  
2.5mV/100µm  
Maximum output  
Resolution  
2.5mV/20µm  
3
Maximum output  
±5V/40mm  
±5V/100mm  
±5V/200mm  
±5V/400mm  
Scale value (3)  
Minimum readout on the display unit  
Number  
5µm  
10µm  
100µm  
Resolution  
2.5mV/5µm  
±5V/10mm  
2.5mV/50µm  
±5V/100mm  
2.5mV/500µm  
±5V/1000mm  
2.5mV/10µm  
±5V/20mm  
2.5mV/100µm  
±5V/200mm  
2.5mV/1mm  
±5V/2000mm  
2.5mV/100µm  
±5V/200mm  
2.5mV/1mm  
±5V/2000mm  
2.5mV/10mm  
±5V/20000mm  
1
Maximum output  
Resolution  
2
3
Maximum output  
Resolution  
Maximum output  
No. 99MBC095A  
4 - 43  
Table 2: Inch unit (E=25.4 mm) (The upper limit of the analog output must be within the  
range of actual measurements)  
Scale value (1)  
Minimum readout on the display unit  
Number  
.000001E  
.000002E  
.000005E  
.00001E  
Resolution  
2.5mV/.000001E  
±5V/.002E  
2.5mV/.000002E  
±5V/.004E  
2.5mV/.000005E  
±5V/.01E  
2.5mV/.00001E  
±5V/.02E  
1
Maximum output  
Resolution  
2.5mV/.00001E  
±5V/.02E  
2.5mV/.00002E  
±5V/.04E  
2.5mV/.00005E  
±5V/.1E  
2.5mV/.0001E  
±5V/.2E  
2
3
Maximum output  
Resolution  
2.5mV/.0001E  
±5V/.2E  
2.5mV/.0002E  
±5V/.4E  
2.5mV/.0005E  
±5V/1E  
2.5mV/.001E  
±5V/2E  
Maximum output  
Scale value (2)  
Number  
Minimum readout on the display unit  
.00002E  
.00005E  
.0001E  
.0002E  
Resolution  
2.5mV/.00002E  
±5V/.04E  
2.5mV/.00005E  
±5V/.1E  
2.5mV/.0001E  
±5V/.2E  
2.5mV/.0002E  
±5V/.4E  
1
2
3
Maximum output  
Resolution  
2.5mV/.0002E  
±5V/.4E  
2.5mV/.0005E  
±5V/1E  
2.5mV/.001E  
±5V/2E  
2.5mV/.002E  
±5V/4E  
Maximum output  
Resolution  
2.5mV/.002E  
±5V/4E  
2.5mV/.005E  
±5V/10E  
2.5mV/.01E  
±5V/20E  
2.5mV/.02E  
±5V/40E  
Maximum output  
Scale value (3)  
Minimum readout on the display unit  
Number  
.0005E  
.005E  
Resolution  
2.5mV/.0005E  
±5V/1E  
2.5mV/.005E  
±5V/10E  
1
Maximum output  
Resolution  
2.5mV/.005E  
±5V/10E  
2.5mV/.05E  
±5V/100E  
2.5mV/.5E  
±5V/1000E  
2
3
Maximum output  
Resolution  
2.5mV/.05E  
±5V/100E  
Maximum output  
4 - 44  
No. 99MBC095A  
4. SETTING UP THE MEASURING CONDITIONS  
4.5.3.6 F4: Setting the preset/zero-set values  
1) Set the preset value and/or mastering value here.  
In this example assume that the preset value is 12.5 mm, the direction is 0 (positive), and  
the mastering value is 0.0. Assume also that the current preset value is 12.345 mm.  
Step 1: The previously set preset value is displayed.  
Enter “12.5”.  
1
2
.
5
Step 2: Preset guidance ( ) turns on and the setup data  
will be saved in memory and the operation  
PROG  
PROG  
automatically proceeds to the direction setting.  
Step 3: Set the direction to “0”.  
Since in this example the previous setting is “0”,  
it is not necessary to enter the same value again.  
However, if there is a need to change the direction  
to “1”, enter “1”.  
Step 4: Press the  
key.  
PROG  
ENT  
The setup data will be saved in memory and the  
operation automatically proceeds to the mastering  
value setting.  
Step 5: Enter “0.0”, which is the mastering value.  
PROG  
PROG  
0
.
0
Step 6: Press the  
key.  
ENT  
The setup data will be saved in memory and the  
operation automatically enters the data output  
condition setting.  
2) Setting the Zero-Set  
Press the key at step 1 in 1). Follow the same procedures described in 1).  
0
3) Canceling Preset/Zero-set  
Press the key at step 1 in 1). Then, press the  
key.  
ENT  
C
Preset/Zero-Set is canceled and the setting mode of data output condition setting is  
automatically entered.  
No. 99MBC095A  
4 - 45  
NOTE How to use the preset function  
1. To obtain an preset value, it is necessary to set up the reference gage in place  
(the preset value is a compensation value determined from the measurement of  
the reference gage). This preset setup takes about 1 second.  
2. If the existing setup value is applied, it is not  
necessary to carry out the preset. To force the  
preset operation using the same data, move the  
highlighted digit place with the  
key. This  
makes the preset carried out, since the system  
judges the data is changed.  
For this operation press the  
key in the  
P.S V/P.SET  
ready state. With this single key operation preset  
will be carried out.  
3. So that the maximum displayable range is not exceeded during measurement, the  
preset value must be set well within the maximum value shown in the table below.  
If measured data exceed the maximum value, “9999999” will be displayed.  
Resolution (µm)  
Maximum value (mm)  
Resolution (E)  
Maximum value (E)  
.000001/.000002/  
.000005  
0.01/0.02/0.05  
±89.99999  
±8.999999  
0.1/0.2/0.5  
±899.9999  
.00001/.00002/.00005/  
.0001/.0002/.0005/.005  
±89.99999  
1/2/5/10/100  
±8999.999  
4. Precautions prior to modifying the unit system  
Note that if an preset value exceeds the above described maximum value when  
the unit system is changed from E to metric, the preset function will automatically  
be reset.  
(Example: If the integer part of the maximum value is restricted to 2 digits,  
converting from 4E to 101.6 mm will exceed the limit.)  
5. To use the combined preset function together with the combined calibration  
function for dual-unit measurement of a DF-type setup, set the direction to “0”  
(positive).  
6. Preset setting is also possible with the following key entry:  
,
, (gage  
P.S V/P.SET  
SHIFT  
size), and  
.
ENT  
7. If  
is entered in the ready state, zero-setting will be performed if no preset  
P.S V/P.SET  
has been made.  
8. Preset/Zero-set can also be canceled with the following key entry:  
,
,
SHIFT  
P.S V/P.SET  
, and  
.
C
ENT  
4 - 46  
No. 99MBC095A  
4. SETTING UP THE MEASURING CONDITIONS  
4.5.3.7 F5: Setting the data output conditions  
Set the data output conditions (0 to 9) and periodical output timer (0 to 999 sec).  
The unit used with the periodical output timer is seconds. Setting it to “0” means that output  
takes place for each measurement.  
In this example assume that the data output condition is 3 and that the periodical output timer  
is 10 seconds.  
Step 1: The previously set data output conditions are  
displayed.  
PROG  
The setup data for the data output conditions is  
shown in the table below.  
RS-232C  
Data output condition  
GP-IB  
DCU  
Printer  
Remark  
0
1
2
3
The periodical output timer can be set  
The periodical output timer can be set  
4
5
6
7
8
9
The periodical output timer can be set  
C.RUN  
key, etc., is pressed.  
: Outputted for each measurement if  
or  
DATA C/RUN  
C.RUN  
: Press the  
or  
key to trigger the measurement. The measurement result will be outputted if it  
DATA C/RUN  
falls on GO.  
: Press the  
C.RUN  
or  
key to trigger the measurement. The result will be outputted if it falls on –NG.  
DATA C/RUN  
: No output will be made.  
Enter “3” as the data output condition.  
PROG  
PROG  
3
Step 2: Press the  
key.  
ENT  
If the data output condition is 1, 3, or 5, the  
operation proceeds to the periodical output timer  
setting, otherwise it proceeds to the sample  
measurement setting.  
Step 3: Set the periodical output timer to 10 seconds.  
PROG  
PROG  
1
0
Step 4: Press the  
memory.  
key to save the setup data in  
ENT  
The operation enters the sample measurement  
setting.  
No. 99MBC095A  
4 - 47  
4.5.3.8 F6: Setting the sample measurement  
Set the conditions for the sample measurement here.  
1. Where “Odd-numbered-edge cutting tool measurement function” has been set to  
“Disable ( )” in the Basic setup.  
For this sample measurement use single-run measurement or continuous-run measurement,  
and select either 0, 1 , or 2 to 999 samples.  
Number of samples Single-run measurement  
Continuous-run measurement  
Called "zero-run measurement".  
Does not function (causes an input error).  
Measurement is initiated by pressing the key assigned to  
single-run measurement, and measurement continues until the  
same key is pressed again. The result of the specified statistical  
item will be displayed as it is latched on the display.  
0
The sample measurement does not take place, but a normal  
single-run measurement does.  
The sample measurement does not take  
place, but a normal continuous-run  
measurement does.  
1
The specified number of samples are measured and the result  
The single-run measurement described at  
of the specified statistical item will be displayed as it is latched the left will be repeated.  
on the display.  
2~999  
In this example assume that the number of samples is 50, and the statistical item is range.  
Step 1: The previously set number of samples flashes.  
PROG  
Enter “50” as the number of samples.  
PROG  
PROG  
5
0
Step 2: Press the  
key.  
ENT  
If the number of samples entered is “1”, the  
operation proceeds to the automatic workpiece  
detection setting, otherwise if “0” or “2 to 999” is  
entered, it proceeds to the statistical item setting.  
Step 3: Select the objective statistical item. Each time the  
key is pressed, the setup option changes in  
the following order:  
→
→
→
. Select  
in this example.  
PROG  
PROG  
(
)
Step 4: Press the  
key.  
ENT  
The operation automatically proceeds to the  
automatic workpiece detection setting.  
4 - 48  
No. 99MBC095A  
4. SETTING UP THE MEASURING CONDITIONS  
2. Where “Odd-numbered-edge cutting tool measurement function” has been set to  
“Enable (  
or  
)” in the Basic setup.  
In this section only the setup operation is described. For the practical measurement  
samples refer to Section 5.3.6 “Application of the odd-numbered-edge cutting tool mea-  
surement”.  
In this example assume that Number of samples =0, Calculation item = “Odd-numbered-  
edge cutting tool measurement”, and Number of odd-numbered cutting edges = 3.  
Step 1: The number of samples that has been already set  
will be blinking.  
PROG  
Enter “0” as the number of samples.  
PROG  
PROG  
Step 2: When  
is entered, the setting will be  
ENT  
accepted and the operation will proceed to the  
setting of workpiece automatic detection if the set  
number of samples is “1”, and to the setting of  
calculation items if the set number of samples is  
“0”, or “2 to 999”.  
Step 3: Select the calculation item. The following calcula-  
tion items will be added to in the place of  
PROG  
“
,
,
,
”.  
: Odd-numbered-edge cutting tool  
diameter measurement  
: Odd-numbered-edge cutting tool  
run-out measurement  
As each time  
is entered the displayed item will sequentially change as  
, select  
→
→
→
→
→
.
Step 4: When  
is entered, the setting will be  
PROG  
ENT  
accepted. At this time the operation will enter the  
setting of workpiece automatic detection if  
,
,
,
,
is selected  
for the calculation item, or the setting of the  
number of cutting edges of odd-numbered-edge  
cutting tool if  
is selected for the  
calculation item.  
Enter “3” as the number of cutting edges of the  
odd-numbered-edge cutting tool.  
PROG  
PROG  
Step 5: When  
is entered, the setting will be ac-  
ENT  
cepted, and the operation automatically proceeds  
to the setting of workpiece automatic detection.  
NOTE Where “  
:Odd-numbered-edge cutting tool diameter measurement” or  
“
:Odd-numbered-edge cutting tool run-out measurement” has been  
selected for the calculation item, available segments will be automatically set and the  
guidance ( ) for setting the segments will be displayed hereafter.  
No. 99MBC095A  
4 - 49  
4.5.3.9 F7: Automatic workpiece detection setting  
Set the conditions for automatic workpiece detection here.  
Select between 0 (no automatic workpiece detection) and 999 measurements, and select  
between 0 to 9999 ms for the invalidation period.  
In this example assume the following:  
Number of measuring times =1, Invalidation period = 100 ms (0.1 sec), Lower detection limit  
= 12.2 mm, Upper detection limit = 12.8 mm.  
Step 1: The previously set data output condition is  
flashing.  
PROG  
Enter “1” as the number of measurements.  
PROG  
PROG  
1
Step 2: Press the  
key.  
ENT  
The operation automatically proceeds to the  
invalidation period setting.  
Step 3: Set the invalidation period to 100 ms.  
PROG  
PROG  
1
0
0
Step 4: Press the  
key.  
ENT  
The operation automatically proceeds to the lower  
detection limit setting.  
Step 5: Set the lower detection limit to 12.2 mm.  
PROG  
PROG  
1
2
.
2
Step 6: Press the  
key.  
ENT  
The operation automatically proceeds to the upper  
detection limit setting.  
Step 7: Set the upper detection limit to 12.8 mm.  
PROG  
PROG  
1
2
.
8
Step 8: Press the  
key.  
ENT  
The operation automatically proceeds to the group  
judgment setting.  
4 - 50  
No. 99MBC095A  
4. SETTING UP THE MEASURING CONDITIONS  
4.5.3.10 F8: Setting the group judgment  
Set the conditions for the group judgment here.  
Select between 0 and 99 for group size (0 and 1 are used for not performing group judg-  
ment).  
In this example assume that the group size is 5, and the objective statistical item is mean.  
Step 1: The previously set group size is flashing.  
PROG  
Enter “5” as the group size.  
PROG  
PROG  
5
Step 2: Press the  
key.  
ENT  
If 0 or 1 is set for the group size in step 1 above,  
the operation automatically proceeds to the  
segment setting, which is the first stage of this  
function setup. Otherwise proceeds to the statisti-  
cal setting.  
Step 3: Select the objective statistical item, Each time the  
key is pressed, the setup option will change  
PROG  
in the following order:  
. Since “mean” is to be set in this  
example, no key input is necessary at this step.  
→
→
→
Step 4: Press the  
key.  
PROG  
PROG  
ENT  
The operation automatically proceeds to the group  
lower limit setting.  
Step 5: Set the group lower limit in the manner similar to  
that of the lower limit setting. Press the  
key  
ENT  
and the operation automatically proceeds to the  
group upper limit setting.  
Step 6: Set the group upper limit in the manner similar to  
PROG  
that of the upper limit setting. Press the  
key  
ENT  
and the operation automatically proceeds to the  
segment setting, which is the first stage of this  
function setup.  
No. 99MBC095A  
4 - 51  
4.5.3.11 Confirming the function setup contents  
Every setting that has been made in the function setup mode can be confirmed using the  
key without affecting the existing setup data.  
ENT  
Step 1: In the ready state press the  
and  
keys  
ENT  
PROG  
SET  
to enter the segment setup mode.  
Step 2: Each time the  
key is pressed, each piece of setup data for segments through  
ENT  
group judgment will be displayed sequentially. Record these data in the List of  
Function Setups, at the end of this user's manual.  
Step 3: Press the  
key twice to return to the ready state.  
SET  
4 - 52  
No. 99MBC095A  
MEASUREMENT MODE  
Perform your measurement according to the basic setup and measuring  
conditions specified.  
5
This chapter describes the items which can be set in the ready state and  
gives measurement examples.  
5.1 Outline of the Measurement Mode  
The measurement mode includes the ready state, single-run measurement mode, and continu-  
ous-run measurement mode.  
1) Ready state  
The BUSY LED flashes each time the measurement is performed.  
2) Single-run measurement  
The RUN LED stays lit from the start of measurement until the display latch timer expires,  
and the BUSY LED turns on each time the measured data is updated.  
3) Continuous-run measurement  
The RUN LED turns on if measurement starts and stays on during repeated measurements.  
The BUSY LED turns on each time the measured data is updated. When measurement is  
terminated the measured data is latched on the display and the RUN LED turns off when  
the display latch time expires.  
5.1.1 Settings made in the measurement mode  
• This system employs a 2-section display unit, which enables continuous display of setup  
values while measurements are being made. Also, it provides a simple method for modify-  
ing the setup values.  
• The setup mode of the specific setup items can be entered either by using the arrow key  
(
) or by pressing the corresponding item keys directly.  
No. 99MBC095A  
5 - 1  
5.1.1.1 Setup operation from the arrow key  
If the  
key is pressed in the ready state, the setup operation will progress in the follow-  
ing way. The displayed contents will vary depending on the basic setup.  
(If edge specification is enabled)  
(If segment specificationis enabled)  
PROG  
PROG  
PROG  
(Where the moving  
average is selected)  
(Where the arithmetical  
average is selected)  
PROG  
PROG  
PROG  
PROG  
(Where the abnormal  
value elimination is specified)  
(If "lower limit value and  
(If the multi-limit  
upper limit value" is specified)  
(If "target + tolerance" is specified)  
selection is specified)  
PROG  
PROG  
PROG  
PROG  
PROG  
PROG  
PROG  
PROG  
PROG  
PROG  
PROG  
PROG  
(This is not displayed when the target  
value is copied to the reference value.)  
(This is not displayed if  
the offset function is canceled.)  
(Where the group  
judgment is specified)  
5 - 2  
No. 99MBC095A  
5. MEASUREMENT MODE  
• The setting procedure is as follows:  
Step 1: Press the key in the ready state to enter the  
setup mode.  
PROG  
Step 2: Each time the  
key is pressed, the setup guidance for each setup item changes  
in the following order:  
(
→
) →  
(
) → (  
→
) →  
→
(
→ • • •  
or  
→
→
) → (  
) →  
→ (  
) → (  
→
). Press the  
key to reverse  
key when the desired setup option is flashing. Press the  
ENT  
this order.  
Step 3: Modify the setup data. The method used to enter data is the same as that used in the  
function setup mode.  
For practice, modify the preset value from 12.5 mm to 12.34567 mm.  
The previously set data is displayed and its least significant digit is flashing.  
Enter “12.34567”.  
PROG  
4
7
1
2
.
3
5
6
Step 4: Press the  
key to initiate the following  
PROG  
ENT  
operation flow: Measure a reference gage, execute  
the compensation calculation, save the setup data  
in memory, then return to the ready state.  
If the insertion of a comma after the thousandth  
digit has been specified in the basic setup, the  
comma will be automatically inserted.  
(In single measurement)  
For a single measurement the most recent setup  
item will always be displayed in the upper section  
of the display unit. However, the upper section of  
the display unit shows a background measurement  
in the simultaneous measurement.  
PROG  
(In simultaneous measurement)  
TIP 1. In simultaneous measurement the upper section of the display unit shows a  
background measurement. However, the setup mode for the foreground program  
can be entered by pressing the  
key.  
2. In single measurement, if an important setup item being displayed in the upper  
section of the display unit is retained, confirmation of the measuring object and  
modification of the setup data is easy.  
3. If the  
key is pressed halfway in the setup operation, the operation is sus-  
SET  
pended and the ready state is restored. This can be used to confirm the setup  
data.  
4. The last setup item made will be displayed first.  
No. 99MBC095A  
5 - 3  
5.1.1.2 Setup that can be made directly from each setup item key  
The user can enter the specific setup mode by pressing the corresponding setup item key in  
the ready state.  
1) key  
LIMIT  
This key is used to enter the setup mode for only the  
GO/NG judgment function.  
PROG  
If the  
key is pressed after the setup data is  
ENT  
entered, the set up data will be saved in memory and  
operation will return to the ready state. If the key  
LIMIT  
or  
key is pressed halfway in the setup operation,  
SET  
the setup operation is aborted, and operation returns to  
the ready state.  
2)  
+
key  
P.S V/P.SET  
SHIFT  
Enters the setup mode only for presetting.  
PROG  
As soon as the setup data is saved in memory with the  
procedure of “Entry of setup data” →  
, the  
ENT  
presetting takes place and then the operation returns to  
the stand-by state.If the key or key is  
P.S V/P.SET  
SET  
pressed halfway in the setup operation, the setup  
operation is aborted, and operation returns to the ready  
state.  
3)  
key  
MASTER/REF  
This key is used to enter the setup mode for only the  
reference value and scale value.  
PROG  
If the  
key is pressed after the setup data is entered,  
ENT  
the setup data will be saved and the operation will return  
to the ready state. If the key or key is  
REF  
SET  
pressed halfway in the setup operation, the setup opera-  
tion is aborted, and operation returns to the ready state.  
4)  
+
key  
MASTER/REF  
SHIFT  
This key combination is used to enter the setup mode  
for only the mastering function.  
PROG  
If the  
key is pressed after the setup data is  
ENT  
entered, the set up data will be saved in memory and  
operation will return to the ready state. If the  
key or  
key is pressed halfway in the  
MASTER/OFFSET  
SET  
setup operation, the setup operation is aborted, and  
operation returns to the ready state.  
5 - 4  
No. 99MBC095A  
5. MEASUREMENT MODE  
5)  
key  
LOCK/UNIT  
This key is used to enter the modification mode of the unit of  
measurement. If the metric unit is currently being used,  
will be flashing; and if the E unit is currently being used,  
will be flashing.  
PROG  
If the  
key is pressed, the unit is changed to that which is currently flashing, then  
ENT  
operation returns to the ready state.  
If the key or key is pressed halfway in the setup operation, the setup  
LOCK/UNIT  
SET  
operation is aborted, and operation returns to the ready state.  
The metric to E (1 E = 25.4 mm) conversion table is shown below.  
No. 99MBC095A  
5 - 5  
5.2 Other Functions  
From the ready state it is possible to activate the following modes.  
5.2.1 Key lock  
Press the  
and LOCK/UNIT keys to activate the key lock mode. Subsequently, key  
SHIFT  
operations other than  
and LOCK/UNIT keys will not be accepted. To cancel this mode,  
SHIFT  
press the same keys again.  
However, if the key lock mode is initiated by the “LOCK” command from the RS-232C/GP-  
IB interface, it can not be canceled by any key operation.  
The only way the key lock mode is canceled is by turning the power off.  
5.2.2 Displaying the measuring position  
• If the  
and  
keys are pressed in the ready state, the measuring position (focal  
READ  
SHIFT  
position) display mode is entered. The ready state can be returned to if the  
key or  
READ  
key is pressed.  
SET  
PROG  
PROG  
(One Measuring Unit)  
(Two Measuring Unit)  
• The displayed value is not defined, but a value that is proportional to the beam diameter at  
the measuring position.  
Since the measurement is defined at the focal position where the displayed value is the  
smallest, take measurements at a position as close to the focal position as possible.  
If the measured position is off the focal position, the measurement accuracy will be  
reduced.  
PROG  
Measuring position on Measuring Unit 2  
Measuring position on Measuring Unit 1  
• Beam diameter at each position  
The laser scanning beam is stopped down so that it has a minimum diameter at the measure-  
ment position (focal position). Since the beam diameter gets thicker the farther it gets from the  
focal point, the repeatability will be reduced if measurements are taken far out.  
Therefore, always perform measurement at the focal position.  
Particularly, note that LSM-500S and LSM-501S have a narrow measuring region. If a  
very thin workpiece is measured outside the measuring region, “Err-0” (no objective  
workpiece present) may be displayed.  
Focal position  
f–θ Lens  
Beam diameter at each position  
• Check the measurement position in the up/down direction with the W.P. LED.  
5 - 6  
No. 99MBC095A  
5. MEASUREMENT MODE  
5.3 Applied Measurement  
Perform measurement according to the conditions set.  
This section gives example operations for a better understanding of the versatile functions of  
this instrument.  
For information about actual setup methods refer to Section 3.4, “Outline of Key Opera-  
tions”, Section 4.1, “Basic Setup”, and Section 4.5, “Setting up the Functions”.  
5.3.1 OD measurement of a precision-machined workpiece  
Perform a single-run measurement and make a GO/NG judgment of the workpiece OD.  
• Suppose that D = 10 ± 0.002 mm.  
• Set the following:  
Segment 1  
Laser scan direction  
Segment 2  
D
1. Segment = 2  
2. Number of scans for averaging = 512 or more  
For precision measurement set a large value.  
3. GO/NG criteria  
Segment 3  
a. Lower limit value = 9.998 mm  
b. Upper limit value = 10.00201 mm  
(If 10.002 mm is accepted as GO, add the resolution to this value. This also applies  
to the following examples.)  
• Measurement  
1. Perform measurement in the ready state.  
The GO/NG LEDs and RUN LED are off, and the  
BUSY LED turns on for each measurement.  
PROG  
GO +NG  
GO +NG  
GO +NG  
RUN BUSY  
RUN BUSY  
RUN BUSY  
-NG  
2. Start a single-run measurement. “  
”
PROG  
will be displayed in the lower section of the display  
unit. Also, the RUN LED lights and stays lit.  
-NG  
3. After the set measurement interval (approximately  
0.32 seconds, for 1024 times averaging), the BUSY  
LED lights for a moment, then the measured data is  
latched on the display.  
PROG  
-NG  
The measured data is subjected to GO/NG judgment,  
and the result will be outputted on the GO/NG  
LEDs. It will also be, depending on the setup,  
outputted to the RS-232C (printer)/GP-IB and  
Digimatic Code Output Unit.  
TIP About the number of scans for averaging and repeatability  
If high accuracy is required, select the largest number of scans for averaging pos-  
sible.  
In general, the more increasing the number of scans for averaging, the more repeat-  
ability is improved.  
No. 99MBC095A  
5 - 7  
5.3.2 Measurement of magnet coil wire that runs at high speed  
This instrument makes 1600 scans per second, which makes it possible to make high accu-  
racy measurements of workpieces that move at high speed and vibrate.  
In the wire drawing process or coating process in which the wire OD must be precisely  
controlled, it is usual to feed back the OD measurement data so that the diameter of the wire  
can be controlled to within the tolerance limits. To avoid a significant change in the feed-  
back, it is most common to use the moving average.  
Below is an example of magnet coil wire with a diameter of ø0.05 ± 0.001 mm (50 ± 1 µm):  
• Basic setup  
1. GO/NG judgment and analog output specification in the ready state  
In the ready state, specify that GO/NG judgment and analog output be performed.  
2. Averaging method  
Specify the moving average.  
3. Method of GO/NG judgment  
Specify (target value + tolerance)  
In addition, set so that the target value can be copied onto the reference value.  
4. Other settings  
Set as required for the operation environment.  
• Function setup  
1. Segment = 2  
2. Number of scans for averaging = 512 (or, 1024 or 2048 times)  
3. GO/NG judgment  
a. Target value = 0.05 mm  
The same value will be automatically set for the reference value. If the scale number  
has not been set (i.e. 0), it is set to “1”. If it has been set, it is not changed.  
b. Lower tolerance limit = -0.001 mm  
c. Upper tolerance limit = 0.001 mm  
• Measurement  
If the power is on, measurement automatically starts  
after the internal error checks have been performed. The  
measured data will be displayed. At the same time the  
GO/NG judgment result will be outputted for the GO/  
NG LEDs and I/O interface. The difference from the  
target value will also be outputted as analog signals.  
PROG  
-NG  
GO +NG  
RUN BUSY  
Record of analog output  
Record of analog output will facilitate process analysis.  
5 - 8  
No. 99MBC095A  
5. MEASUREMENT MODE  
TIP Through the basic setup the following functions are made available in addition to  
those above.  
1. The display value can be held while the HOLD signal is on, by specifying “HOLD”  
input for OFFS signal input of the I/O interface.  
2. The analog output signal voltage representing the wire breakage (Err-0) can be  
selected from 0V, +5V, and -5V.  
No. 99MBC095A  
5 - 9  
5.3.3 Measurement of the lead pitch of a multiple-pin IC  
If the edge specification is made, it is possible to measure a dimension between two optional  
edges from between 1 and 255 edges. This can be applied to inspecting the IC lead bend and  
measurement of the head gap of an HDD.  
Below is an example where the IC lead bend of a 160-pin flat package IC must be checked  
using the automatic workpiece detection function. Assume that the pin thickness and lead-to-  
lead interval are identical according to the specification.  
The following IC specifications are used: 40 leads are on one side, the lead-to-lead interval is  
0.635 mm (1/40"), the pitch tolerance is 0.01 mm.  
• Basic setup  
Laser scan direction  
1. Segment specification  
Edge 1  
Specify the edge specification method.  
2. Automatic workpiece detection  
Edge 2  
Specify use of automatic workpiece detection.  
1PIN  
2PIN  
P1  
P2  
• Function setup  
1. Segment  
a. Start segment = 2  
b. Finish segment = 81  
3PIN  
(Last lead number x 2 +1)  
2. Number of scans for averaging = 32  
3. GO/NG judgment  
a. Lower limit = 0.625 mm  
b. Upper limit = 0.645 mm  
4. Setting automatic measurement  
Specify the pitch measurement.  
5. Automatic workpiece detection setup  
Measurement time = 1  
39PIN  
40PIN  
P39  
Edge 81  
Edge 82  
Invalidation period = 20 ms  
Lower detection limit = 0.6 mm  
Upper detection limit = 0.67 mm  
5 - 10  
No. 99MBC095A  
5. MEASUREMENT MODE  
• Measurement  
Press the  
key.  
PROG  
C.RUN  
“
” is displayed and continuous-run  
measurement starts.  
Provided that edges 1 through 82 are detected within  
the measuring region and that the measurements of the  
edges 2 and 3 are within the detection range, the system  
recognizes the workpiece presence and starts actual  
measurements after the elapse of invalidation period.  
GO +NG  
RUN BUSY  
-NG  
In approximately 0.82 second after the invalidation  
period the measured data will be displayed.  
If the tolerancing judgment result is “GO”, the mean  
value is displayed.  
If the judgment result is “±NG”, the number of the pin  
pitch where “±NG” was detected for the first time is  
also displayed.  
PROG  
-NG  
GO +NG  
RUN BUSY  
If the next objective IC enters the measuring region, it is automatically detected and  
measurement will be repeated.  
TIP 1. Measurement time of automatic measurement  
{ (Number of objective leads of measurement) x (Measurement interval) + (calcu-  
lation time: 20 ms)} = (40 x 20 + 20) ms = 0.82 second.  
2. If GO/NG judgment is ±NG  
The ±NG measurement data, which is detected first, is displayed and the judg-  
ment result is outputted. Subsequent measurement is stopped.  
3. For the automatic workpiece detection on IC or connector measurement, the part  
to be measured of the smallest edge number (falls on pin No.1) is used for  
detection, if the diameter-detection method is specified.  
With the position-detection method measurement starts when an edge of the  
smallest edge number is detected.  
IMPORTANT About automatic measurement of a moving workpiece  
For automatic measurement on a multi-pin IC, etc., this instrument will sequentially  
perform measurement from the smallest edge number in the scanning range. For  
this reason, if any edge moves outside the scanning range during measurement, the  
edge number may change, resulting in incorrect measurement. Therefore, allow a  
sufficient measuring time including the invalidation period for automatic measure-  
ment.  
If possible, take measures so that the workpiece stops within the measuring region.  
No. 99MBC095A  
5 - 11  
5.3.4 Applied Measurement with Preset/Zero-Set Functions  
1. Applied measurement with preset function 1  
The preset function can be applied for converting  
the reference gage dimension to a nominal dimen-  
sion (Figure a).  
Laser scan direction  
Segment 1  
Segment 2  
øD  
In Figure a set the preset direction to “0” (positive).  
Example of [figure a]  
Segment 3  
[Figure a]  
Let D = 20.0005 ± 0.0015 mm  
• Basic setup  
Set up according to the requirement.  
• Function setup  
1. Segment = 2  
2. Number of scans for averaging = 512  
3. GO/NG judgment  
a. Lower limit  
= 19.9985 mm  
b. Upper limit  
= 20.0015 mm  
4. Preset  
a. Set the nominal dimension of the gage to 20.0 mm.  
b. Direction = 0 (positive)  
• Measurement  
PROG  
The ready state display appears as shown at the right  
before the preset is set.  
GO +NG  
GO +NG  
GO +NG  
RUN BUSY  
RUN BUSY  
RUN BUSY  
-NG  
If the preset value is set to 20.0 mm, the guidance  
display for the PRESET guidance indicator ( ) turns  
on, and the measurement is also replaced to 20.0 mm.  
PROG  
-NG  
Press the  
“
key.  
PROG  
DATA C/RUN  
” is displayed and single-run measure-  
ment starts.  
After the first measurement interval the measurement  
value is displayed, and the GO/NG judgement result is  
outputted.  
-NG  
TIP 1. To re-activate the preset function using the existing preset value and direction,  
press the key. With this single key operation, preset can be achieved.  
P.S V/P.SET  
2. It is possible to obtain a deviation from the reference gage by presetting (zero-  
setting) it to “0.0”.  
5 - 12  
No. 99MBC095A  
5. MEASUREMENT MODE  
2. Applied measurement with preset function 2  
Reference piece  
The preset function is used to measure a  
workpiece larger than the measuring range  
of this system.  
Laser scan direction  
Workpiece  
Segment 1  
W
L
In Figure b set the preset direction to “1”  
(negative).  
Example of [figure b]  
Let L = 50.0 ± 0.01 mm  
Reference surface  
• Basic setup  
[Figure b]  
Set up according to the requirement.  
• Function setup  
1. Segment = 1  
2. Number of scans for averaging = 512  
3. GO/NG judgment  
a. Lower limit = 49.99 mm  
b. Upper limit = 50.01 mm  
4. Preset  
a. Set to 50.0 mm.  
b. Direction = 1 (negative)  
• Measurement  
The ready state display appears as shown at the right  
before the preset is set.  
PROG  
Since the preset has not been set, the gap of segment 1  
is measured.  
GO +NG  
GO +NG  
GO +NG  
RUN BUSY  
RUN BUSY  
RUN BUSY  
-NG  
Set the preset to 50.0 mm. The measurement value is  
also replaced by 50.0 mm.  
As the gap measurement is selected, set here the  
negative direction (1).  
PROG  
-NG  
Press the  
key.  
PROG  
DATA C/RUN  
“
” is displayed and single-run measure-  
ment starts.  
After the first measurement interval the measured value  
is displayed, and the GO/NG judgment result is output-  
ted.  
-NG  
No. 99MBC095A  
5 - 13  
3. Applied measurement of preset 3  
Make the combined preset enabled in the DF-type dual-  
unit measurement.  
Measuring unit 2  
Measuring unit 1  
5
D
Example of [figure c]  
1
Suppose that D = 250.0 ±0.05 mm.  
• Basic setup  
[figure c]  
Set the dual-unit measurement type to DF type.  
• Function setup  
1. Segment = (1 + 5)  
2. Number of scans for averaging = 512 times  
3. GO/NG judgment  
a. Lower limit value = 249.95 mm  
b. Upper limit value = 250.05 mm  
4. Preset value  
a. Set to 250.0 mm.  
b. Direction = 1 (negative)  
• Measurement  
Before setting the preset function, the display appears  
as shown at the right.  
PROG  
Since the preset function is not enabled yet, the gap  
(segments 1 +5) will be measured.  
GO +NG  
GO +NG  
GO +NG  
RUN BUSY  
RUN BUSY  
RUN BUSY  
-NG  
Set the preset value to 250.0 mm. Since this is a gap  
measurement, set the direction to 1 (negative).  
PROG  
-NG  
Press the  
key.  
PROG  
DATA C/RUN  
“
” will be displayed and single-run  
measurement will start.  
After the set measurement interval the measured value  
is latched on the display, and the GO/NG judgment  
result is outputted.  
-NG  
NOTE About the combined preset  
1. The combined preset is used to measure a workpiece that has a dimension close  
to that of the reference gage. For measuring workpieces with various dimensions,  
use the combined calibration.  
2. To use the combined preset together with the combined calibration, set the  
direction to “0” (positive).  
3. If the combined calibration or individual calibration for each Measuring Unit is  
canceled, the combined preset is also canceled.  
5 - 14  
No. 99MBC095A  
5. MEASUREMENT MODE  
4. Applied measurement with the zero-set function  
Guide roller  
Use the zero-set function to easily measure a  
tape thickness.  
T
First measure segment 1 (W0) after removing  
the tape from the guide roller, which is used  
as a reference gage.  
Set the tape as the measurement objective on  
the guide, then measure segment 1 (W). The  
tape thickness (T) is obtained from: T = (W0  
- W)  
Segment 1  
[figure d]  
W
W0  
Reference Piece  
For this measurement use the zero-set  
function.  
Convert (zero-set) W0 to 0.0 mm and set the direction as 1 (negative). The following results:  
T = {W0 - (-W)} = 0.0 - (-W) = W  
Here is an example of measuring a tape with a thickness of T = 0.1 ± 0.005 mm.  
• Basic setup  
Set up as required.  
• Function setup  
1. Segment = 1  
2. Number of scans for averaging = 128  
3. GO/NG judgment  
a. Lower limit = 0.095 mm  
b. Upper limit = 0.105 mm  
• Measurement  
Remove the tape and preset (zeroset) with “0.0”.  
Then set up the tape.  
PROG  
The tape thickness will be displayed, however, GO/NG  
judgment is not performed.  
GO +NG  
RUN BUSY  
-NG  
Press the  
key.  
PROG  
C.RUN  
“
” is displayed and continuous-run  
measurement starts.  
GO +NG  
RUN BUSY  
-NG  
At every measurement interval the measured data is  
displayed, and the GO/NG judgment result is outputted.  
PROG  
Press the  
key or  
key.  
C.RUN  
DATA C/RUN  
The most recent measurement is displayed, and mea-  
surement is stopped.  
GO +NG  
RUN BUSY  
-NG  
No. 99MBC095A  
5 - 15  
5.3.5 Sample measurement  
In addition to the diameter, a roller in a paper-  
feed mechanism requires a high machining  
accuracy with respect to both the roundness and  
cylindricity.  
Knife-edge  
Segment 1  
Runout: T  
In this example suppose that the roller is being  
turned to measure the runout.  
In the diagram at the right the roller is  
turning, and the gap of segment 1 is mea-  
sured to determine the runout of T while  
segment 2 is measured to determine the OD.  
Segment 2  
This runout can be derived from the range  
(maximum - minimum) of sample measurements.  
In this example a knife-edge is used for stable  
gap measurement, however, a round pin can  
also be used if appropriate.  
Segment 3  
Here is an example of measuring a rubber roller with a diameter of ø25.0 ±0.05 mm and a  
runout tolerance of T = 0.03 mm.  
• Basic setup  
Specify simultaneous measurement.  
• Function setup  
Setup item  
Segment  
Program0 (Foreground)  
Program5 (Background)  
1
2
Number of scans for  
averaging  
64  
64  
Lower limit value  
Upper limit value  
Number of sample  
0.0  
24.95  
25.05  
50  
0.03  
50  
range  
Statistical item  
mean  
(maximum value - minimum value)  
NOTE: The rubber roller must be turned more than 360 degrees. Number of scans for averaging is determined  
from the revolution speed and the sample number.  
5 - 16  
No. 99MBC095A  
5. MEASUREMENT MODE  
• Measurement  
In the ready state the gap dimension of segment 1 is  
displayed.  
PROG  
GO +NG  
GO +NG  
GO +NG  
RUN BUSY  
RUN BUSY  
RUN BUSY  
-NG  
Press the  
“
ment starts.  
key to start the measurement.  
” is displayed and the sample measure-  
PROG  
DATA C/RUN  
-NG  
In this example the measurement result will be dis-  
played and the GO/NG judgment result will be output  
approximately 1 second after measurement starts.  
PROG  
-NG  
No. 99MBC095A  
5 - 17  
5.3.6 Application of the odd-numbered-edge cutting tool measurement  
5.3.6.1 Odd-numbered-edge cutting tool outside diameter measurement  
Since if the outside diameter measurement is  
Odd-numbered-edge cutting tool  
performed on a cutting tool which has an  
odd number of cutting edges (such as drills  
and end mills) using normal Segment 2,  
measurement errors will be produced.  
Therefore, in this case, use the “Odd-  
numbered-edge cutting tool measurement  
function” for measurement.  
Segment 3  
(minimum value)  
Error  
Calculate the target outside diameter from  
the data collected with the “Sample mea-  
surement” while the workpiece was rotating.  
Reference bar  
This method can be applied to any outside  
diameter measurement of even-numbered-  
edge cutting tool and gear teeth, etc. beside  
an odd-numbered-edge cutting tool.  
• Measurement example: (case of the above shown settings)  
3-cutting-edge end mill/øD = ø10.0±0.003mm  
Workpiece  
Layout of reference bar (edge)  
Number of workpiece revolutions  
Segment 3 (lower) side  
4 rpm  
• Modifying the basic setup:  
Setting item  
No.  
Item display  
Setup contents  
Odd-numbered cutting  
edge measurement  
B3  
• Modifying the basic setup:  
Setting item  
Segment  
No.  
F0  
Item display  
Setup contents  
Automatic setup (*1)  
128 times (*2)  
Number of averaging times  
F1  
Lower limit value  
Upper limit value  
9.997 mm  
F2  
F6  
GO/NG judgment  
10.003 mm  
Number of samples  
Calculation item  
0 (Zero-run measurement)  
(tool outside diameter)  
(*1): At the stage when “  
” is set from the “Calculation item”, the available  
segments will be automatically set and the guidance for that item will not be dis-  
played any more.  
(*2): It is necessary to measure the workpiece (odd-numbered-edge cutting tool) while  
rotating it. Determine the number of averaging times depending on the number of  
workpiece revolutions.  
(In this example it is assumed that the number of workpiece revolutions is approxi-  
mately 4 rpm.)  
5 - 18  
No. 99MBC095A  
5. MEASUREMENT MODE  
• Measurement:  
Step 1: In the stand-by state the indicated value includes  
errors (i.e. it is smaller than the actual dimension),  
PROG  
since the measured value of Segment 2 is displayed.  
At this stage begin rotating the workpiece.  
GO +NG  
GO +NG  
GO +NG  
RUN BUSY  
RUN BUSY  
RUN BUSY  
-NG  
Step 2: Enter  
.
PROG  
DATA C/RUN  
When “  
” is displayed in the lower  
display section, the zero-run measurement  
commences.  
-NG  
Step 3: If  
is entered again after the  
PROG  
DATA C/RUN  
workpiece has been rotated for more than one turn  
since the start of measurement, the measured value  
will be latched on the display and then the  
measurement is completed.  
-NG  
TIP Relationship between “Number of workpiece revolutions” and “Number of averaging  
times”  
• The following table shows the relationship between “Number of workpiece revolu-  
tions” and “Number of averaging times” if 360 pieces of data are obtained while  
the workpiece rotates one full turn (at 1° increments). Use it as a standard.  
Measuring time  
Number of averaging times Number of workpiece revolutions  
(Time required for one revolution)  
32  
64  
16 rpm  
8 rpm  
approx 3.8 sec  
approx 7.5 sec  
approx 15 sec  
approx 30 sec  
approx 60 sec  
approx 120 sec  
128  
256  
512  
1024  
4 rpm  
2 rpm  
1 rpm  
0.5 rpm  
• The more the number of averaging times, the repeatability will be more stable. In  
order to measure at a highest accuracy, set this number of averaging times as  
large as possible (the number of revolutions is as small as possible).  
No. 99MBC095A  
5 - 19  
5.3.6.2 Odd-numbered-edge cutting tool run-out measurement  
Measure the run-out of the cutting edge of the odd-numbered-edge cutting tool as follows.  
As shown in the figure below, set the measuring rage so as to separately contain each cutting  
edge.  
Measure the minimum value of Segment 3 in each edge measuring range through the  
“Sample measurement”.  
Calculate the range (maximum - minimum) of the measured data as many as the number of  
cutting edges being set, and display the result as the measured data of “Run-out”.  
This method can be applied to any run-out measurement of even-numbered-edge cutting tool  
and gear teeth (teeth tips), etc. beside an odd-numbered-edge cutting tool.  
Measuring range of cutting edge 2  
Measuring range of  
cutting edge 3  
Odd-numbered-edge  
cutting tool  
Segment 3  
(Minimum value)  
Measuring range of  
cutting edge 1  
Reference bar  
• Measurement example: (case of the above shown figure)  
Workpiece  
3-cutting-edge end mill/øD = ø10.0 mm  
Segment 3 (lower) side  
4 rpm  
Layout of reference bar (edge)  
Number of workpiece revolutions  
• Modifying the basic setup:  
Setting item  
No.  
Item display  
Setup contents  
Odd-numbered cutting  
edge measurement  
B3  
•
Modifying the function settings:  
Setting item  
No.  
F0  
Item display  
Setup contents  
Automatic setup (*1)  
128 times (*2)  
Segment  
Number of averaging times  
Number of samples  
F1  
0 (Zero-run measurement)  
(Tool run-out)  
F6  
Calculation item  
Number of cutting edges of the tool  
3
(*1): At the stage when “  
” is set from the “Calculation item”, the available  
segments will be automatically set and the guidance for that item will not be dis-  
played any more.  
(*2): It is necessary to measure the workpiece (odd-numbered-edge cutting tool) while  
rotating it. Determine the number of averaging times depending on the number of  
workpiece revolutions.  
(In this example it is assumed that the number of workpiece revolutions is approxi-  
mately 4 rpm.)  
5 - 20  
No. 99MBC095A  
5. MEASUREMENT MODE  
• Measurement:  
Step 1: In the stand-by state the indicated value includes  
errors (i.e. it is smaller than the actual dimension),  
PROG  
since the measured value of Segment 2 is displayed.  
Set the start point of “Measuring range of cutting  
edge 1” to the measuring point.  
GO +NG  
RUN BUSY  
-NG  
Step 2: Enter  
.
PROG  
DATA C/RUN  
When “  
” is displayed in the lower  
display section, the zero-run measurement  
commences.  
The numerical data shown in the lower section of  
display unit at this time means “Number of cutting  
GO +NG  
RUN BUSY  
-NG  
edges not measured yet (number of remaining measurements)”. In this example, the  
cutting tool will automatically stop after once it has rotated at the speed of 4 rpm  
(number of revolutions) to the finish point of “Measuring range of cutting edge 1”.  
Step 3: If  
is entered again after the  
PROG  
DATA C/RUN  
rotation has stopped rotated, “Temporary  
measurement” of Cutting edge 1 will be latched on  
the display and then the measurement is completed  
for the time being.  
GO +NG  
GO +NG  
GO +NG  
GO +NG  
RUN BUSY  
RUN BUSY  
RUN BUSY  
RUN BUSY  
-NG  
Step 4: In the same way, perform measurement for  
“Measuring range of cutting edge 2” according to  
the procedure of Step 2 and Step 3.  
PROG  
-NG  
Step 5: In the same way, perform measurement for  
“Measuring range of cutting edge 3” according to  
the procedure of Step 2 and Step 3.  
PROG  
-NG  
Step 6: In this example, as the number of cutting edges is  
set to “3”, the measured data will be calculated and  
the result will be latched on the display at the stage  
when the measurement of “Measuring range of  
cutting edge 3” is completed, then the measurement  
will be terminated.  
PROG  
-NG  
TIP For the relationship between “Number of workpiece revolutions” and “Number of  
averaging times” refer to Section 5.3.6.1 “Odd-numbered-edge cutting tool outside  
diameter measurement”.  
No. 99MBC095A  
5 - 21  
5.3.7 Applied measurement with automatic workpiece detection  
If a workpiece of the specified range of dimension enters the measuring region, measurement  
will be automatically started.  
L
a
b
(a)  
(b)  
(c)  
(n)  
D
Workpiece flow V mm/s  
D = 5.0 ±0.0015 mm, L = 12 mm, chamfer a = 0.5 mm, b = 0.5 mm, and V = 50 mm/s.  
• Basic setup  
Select the OD detection method for automatic workpiece detection, and specify 16 for the  
detecting speed (number of scans).  
• Function setup  
1. Segment = 2  
2. Number of scans for averaging = 512  
Set to the maximum value of (Measurement interval) < (L- 2a) / V.  
3. GO/NG judgment  
a. Lower limit = 4.9985 mm  
b. Upper limit = 5.0015 mm  
4. Analog output  
a. Reference value = 5.0 mm  
b. Scale value = 1  
To be set if used.  
5. Automatic workpiece detection  
a. Number of measurements n = 1  
b. Invalidation period t = 50 ms  
t > (a / V)  
c. Lower detection limit L = 4.9 mm  
Set using the dimension excluding the chamfered portion.  
d. Upper detection limit H = 5.1 mm  
NOTE About automatic workpiece detection  
If sequentially fed workpieces have a small chamfer and they are almost in contact,  
workpieces may not be clearly identified. If this is the case, use connection rods, for  
example, for adequate intervals.  
In addition, allow a sufficient margin for the invalidation period and upper and lower  
detection limits.  
5 - 22  
No. 99MBC095A  
5. MEASUREMENT MODE  
• Measurement  
The diagram at the right indicates that no workpiece is  
present in the measuring region in the ready state.  
PROG  
GO +NG  
RUN BUSY  
-NG  
Press the  
key to start continuous measurement  
PROG  
C.RUN  
while changing the display from “  
” to  
“
.” If workpiece (a) enters the measur-  
ing region, OD measurement will automatically be  
started.  
GO +NG  
RUN BUSY  
-NG  
If the OD measurement resulting from 16 scans is  
within the preset limits, a workpiece is judged as being  
present (“workpiece present”). The system waits until  
the specified invalidation period elapses.  
After the invalidation period elapses, OD measurement  
of workpiece (a) is started. At every measurement  
interval the measured data will be displayed and the  
GO/NG judgment results will be output.  
PROG  
GO +NG  
RUN BUSY  
-NG  
Measurement of workpiece (b) entered.  
As with workpiece (a) measurement is performed and  
the results are displayed.  
PROG  
GO +NG  
RUN BUSY  
-NG  
Workpieces that enter the measuring region are mea-  
sured sequentially.  
PROG  
GO +NG  
RUN BUSY  
-NG  
To terminate measurement, press the  
key  
PROG  
DATA C/RUN  
or  
key again.  
C.RUN  
The most recently measured data will be displayed.  
GO +NG  
RUN BUSY  
-NG  
No. 99MBC095A  
5 - 23  
5.3.8 Applied measurement on a stepped round bar  
øA  
øB  
In this example 10 stepped round bars are measured  
and the results are statistically processed. If ±NG  
measurement is obtained, it will be automatically  
printed out.  
In the figure at the right suppose the following:  
øA: ø6 ±0.01 mm  
øB: ø10h70-0.015 mm  
• Basic setup  
1. Set the resolution to 0.1 µm.  
2. Specify the RS-232C port as the printer port.  
• Function setup  
Setup item  
Segment  
Program0 (Foreground)  
Program1 (background)  
2
2
Number of scans for  
averaging  
512  
512  
Lower limit value  
Upper limit value  
Data output condition  
Other condition  
5.99  
6.01  
2
9.985  
10.0  
2
0 (cancel)  
0 (cancel)  
• Preparation for measurement  
Press the  
and  
keys to clear all of the statistical memory, then press the  
A.CL/M.CL  
SHIFT  
key to start statistical processing. If the statistical processing mode is entered,  
STAT/S.E  
the S.E. guidance indicator ( ) turns on.  
• Measurement  
PROG  
Perform a single-run measurement for the A dimension  
by program No.00 after setting the workpiece in place.  
The measured data will be displayed and the GO/NG  
judgment result will be outputted.  
GO +NG  
RUN BUSY  
-NG  
Change to Program No.01 for the B dimension to be  
measured through single-run measurement.  
The measured data will be displayed and the GO/NG  
judgment result will be outputted.  
PROG  
GO +NG  
RUN BUSY  
-NG  
Change the workpiece and repeat the same measure-  
ments.  
PROG  
GO +NG  
RUN BUSY  
-NG  
If the result is ±NG, it will be automatically printed out.  
PROG  
GO +NG  
RUN BUSY  
-NG  
5 - 24  
No. 99MBC095A  
5. MEASUREMENT MODE  
• Confirming the statistical data on the display (not always required)  
Press the  
and  
keys in the ready state to  
STAT/S.E  
PROG  
SHIFT  
enter the statistical display mode for Program No.0. If  
this mode is entered, the number of samples is dis-  
played first.  
GO +NG  
RUN BUSY  
-NG  
Each time the  
key is pressed, the statistical processing item changes in the following  
ENT  
order: Number of samples: → Standard deviation:  
Minimum value: → Mean: → Range: → Number of samples:  
→ Maximum value:  
→
.
Press the  
and  
keys to return to the  
STAT/S.E  
PROG  
SHIFT  
ready state, and confirm the statistical data of Program  
No.1 in the same way.  
GO +NG  
RUN BUSY  
-NG  
• Printing the statistical data  
Use the  
and  
keys to print out the statistical data. This automatically  
S.PR/PRINT  
SHIFT  
clears all of the statistical memory after printout.  
An example printout is shown below.  
An example printout  
P:0  
P:1  
P:0  
P:1  
-NG  
-NG  
+NG  
+NG  
5.989,9  
5.984,9  
6.010,1  
10.000,1  
STAT. DATA  
PROGRAM NO.  
N
= 0  
10  
AVG  
MAX  
MIN  
R
6.003,2  
6.010,4  
5.989,9  
0.020,5  
0.007,85  
S.D  
STAT. DATA  
PROGRAM NO.  
=
1
N
10  
AVG  
MAX  
MIN  
R
9.993,6  
10.000,1  
9.984,9  
0.015,2  
0.006,99  
S.D  
No. 99MBC095A  
5 - 25  
MEMO  
5 - 26  
No. 99MBC095A  
INTERFACE UNIT  
This chapter describes the setup method and functions provided with the  
I/O analog interface and RS-232C interface of this unit.  
6
6.1 Standard Interface  
6.1.1 I/O Analog Interface  
Below is a description of the I/O analog output interface.  
This interface is used to communicate with a PC, programmable controller, by means of  
sequential signals. Since it can also capable of analog output, which may be used for feed-  
back controls and continuous recording of workpiece deviations.  
6.1.1.1 External view of the connector  
A1  
A6  
Open the protection cover of the terminal block to  
access to the terminals. At your wiring use the sup-  
ported signal-name seals that correspond to each  
terminal number for identification.  
A1  
A2  
A3  
A4  
A5  
A6  
B1  
B2  
B3  
B4  
B5  
B6  
B6  
B1  
No. 99MBC095A  
6 - 1  
6.1.1.2 Terminal names  
Terminal No. Signal name  
Function  
Frame ground (connected to the casing)  
I/O direction  
A1  
A2  
A3  
FG  
STS  
GO  
—
¥ Used for connecting the shielded wire of I/O signal cables  
Output of measurement condition (status)  
¥ Turned out H level (OFF) in the event of “Err-0”  
Out  
Out  
• GO/NG judgment result output (GO)  
• With the basic setup, this can be changed to strobe signal (STB) or  
¥ measurement in-progress signal (ACK) output.  
A4  
A5  
A6  
+NG  
-NG  
GO/NG judgment result output (+NG)  
GO/NG judgment result output (-NG)  
Out  
Out  
Out  
GND  
GND Digital ground  
¥ Common ground terminal of both output (A2 thru A5) and input (B4 thru B6)  
—
B1  
FG  
Frame ground (connected to the casing)  
¥ Used for connecting the shielded wire of I/O signal cables  
B2  
B3  
B4  
ALG  
0V  
Analog voltage output  
Out  
Out  
In  
0V output of analog voltage output  
PSET  
Preset input  
¥ Can be changed to hold (HOLD) by the basic setup.  
B5  
B6  
RUN  
RES  
Input of trigger command of single-run measurement  
¥ Can be changed to a trigger for continuous-run measurement with term  
¥ specification by the basic setup.  
In  
In  
• Input of CLEAR command, same as the  
key  
C
6.1.1.3 Input/output equivalent circuit  
(1) Input circuit  
2.7KΩ  
Connected to the inside (+24V)  
Input signal  
(OFFS, RUN, RES)  
• Input low-level signals between 0 and 1 V. Generally drive this circuit with an open  
collector-type transistor.  
• Maximum current drawn from the input signal terminal is 12 mA.  
6 - 2  
No. 99MBC095A  
6. INTERFACE UNIT  
(2) Output circuit  
51Ω  
Output signal  
(GO, -NG, +NG, STS)  
GND  
• Maximum rating of the output transistor is 30 V, 50 mA.  
Refer to Section 6.2.2.4 , “Analog output”.  
(3) Analog output  
TIP 1. If “Err-0” (specified workpiece not present) occurs, the following remedies are  
taken:  
• ±NG and GO signals are turned OFF if this error occurs.  
• Single-run measurement and zero-run measurement will be terminated without  
outputting the results.  
• During continuous-run measurement or continuous-run measurement with term  
specification ACK remains ON. The measurement can be resumed after “Err-0” is  
rectified.  
2. Connecting the second I/O interface will disable the input circuit/output circuit of  
the standard interface.  
(Analog output can be used.)  
No. 99MBC095A  
6 - 3  
TIP • Terminal “GND” and “0V” are connected to “FG” (Frame of LSM-6200). Therefore,  
keep the voltage level of these terminals to 0V.  
• In practice, do not make connections to the “GND” terminal for the control input  
and “0V” terminal for analog output. Otherwise, this system may result in an  
operation error due to electrical interference or other problems.  
• Always use a shielded-wire cable. Otherwise, the system may experience electri-  
cal interference resulting in operation errors. Or, radio frequency will be emitted  
from this system and interfere the electrical equipment.  
Use the following diagram for fabricating the cable.  
Signal lines  
Shielding wire  
To FG  
• Observe the following precautions when relays are used for control circuits. Use  
the following diagram when designing the control circuit.  
1. Several kV of current may be induced the moment the relay is turned OFF,  
which may cause relay-driven components to be damaged. Or, the induced  
voltage may cause the system to malfunction. Always insert protective compo-  
nents such as diodes in the circuit.  
2. To drive equipment that operates on alternative current, always implement a  
protective circuit (spark killer) to protect the relay contacts. In general, if the  
current load is caused by induction, add protective circuit (A) or (B).  
3. Refer to the manual of each relay for selection. It describes the method of  
calculating the protection circuit (or selection of protective parts) depending on  
the load.  
+24V  
R1  
GO/NG judgment result output  
R2  
Q1  
D1  
K
Load  
K
(A)  
(B)  
GND  
0V  
Recommended values:  
Suppose that the sensitivity of a relay is 50 mA, the following design is recom-  
mended:  
• R1: 4.7 kΩ, R2: 4.7 kΩ  
• Q1: 2SA953 (Manufacturer: NEC, etc.)  
• D1: 10D10 (Manufacturer: Japan Inter, etc.)  
6 - 4  
No. 99MBC095A  
6. INTERFACE UNIT  
6.1.1.4 Timing chart  
• Single-run measurement  
TIN  
RES  
RUN  
ACK  
STB  
TIN  
TIN  
TAD  
TBO  
TSO  
TAD  
TDO  
GO, ±NG  
• Zero-run measurement  
RES  
RUN  
TIN  
TIN  
TAD  
TAD  
ACK  
TSO  
STB  
TDO  
GO, ±NG  
• Continuous-run measurement  
RES  
TIN  
TIN  
RUN  
TAD  
TAD  
TSO  
ACK  
TBO  
TBC  
TBC  
STB  
TSO  
TSO  
TDO  
GO, ±NG  
• Continuous-run measurement with term specification  
RES  
RUN  
TRA  
ACK  
TBO  
TBC  
TBC  
TSO  
TSO  
TSO  
STB  
TAD  
TDO  
GO, ±NG  
No. 99MBC095A  
6 - 5  
• Output in the ready state (if the basic setup is determined to enable output in the ready  
state)  
RES  
RUN  
ACK  
STB  
TSO  
TSO  
TDO  
TDO  
GO, ±NG  
HOLD  
TIN or more  
• Response time  
Item  
Response time  
Description  
TIN  
TAD  
Tif  
> (Tif x 2 + 3 ms)  
< (Tif x 2 + 3 ms)  
5 ms, 2 ms, 20 ms  
Input time  
Acceptance time  
Delay time by filter  
Can be selected by Expanded basic setup (“7 IFF”).  
Refer to p.6-37, p.6-38, Strobe length (TSO).  
0.05 ms to 0.2 ms  
Strobe length  
TSO  
TDO  
TBO  
TBC  
TBD  
Tmr  
N
Data setup time  
< (Tmr x N + 3 ms)  
Duration of Single-run measurement  
Duration of continuous-run measurement  
Duration of ready state  
< (Tmr x N + 1 ms)  
< (Tmr + 1 ms)  
Refer to p.6-37, p.6-38, Measurement interval (Tmr)  
Measurement interval  
Refer to Section 9.2.4, Number of samples (“6 SMP N”).  
And refer to Section 4.5.3.8, Number of samples (“6 SMP N”)  
Number of samples (SMP N)  
• Other  
1. Use negative-true logic pulses of TIN or more for the input signals.  
2. RES signal clears the previous measurement result and interrupts the measuring  
operation.  
3. Simultaneous input of multiple signals is not accepted.  
4. During measurement only RES, RUN or HOLD signals are accepted.  
NOTE 1. Zero-run measurement is enabled only if the RUN input is set to “S.RUN” in the  
basic setup.  
2. While the HOLD signal is ON, the GO, ±NG, STB and analog output signals are  
held without being updated.  
6 - 6  
No. 99MBC095A  
6. INTERFACE UNIT  
6.1.2 RS-232C Interface  
The standard RS-232C interface of this Display Unit allows the LSM to communicate with  
external devices via RS-232C (EIA standard) serial signals.  
Prior to using this interface , set up the baud rate, data bits, and parity check, etc. according  
to Section 4.1, “Basic Setup”. The setting contents must be compatible to that on the external  
device to be connected.  
6.1.2.1 Specifications  
• Applicable plug connector: D-sub 9 pin (Female) (Manufacturer: AMP, HD-20/747951-  
1)or equivalent.  
1
5
The pin numbering for this system is shown at the left  
6
9
• Communication specifications  
Device definition  
Communication method  
Synchronizing method  
Baud rate  
Specify the LSM as a terminal (DTE)  
Full-duplex  
Start/stop method (asynchronous)  
4800, 9600, 19200, 38400 bps  
Transmission code  
Data bits  
ASCII  
7 or 8 bits  
1 bit  
Start bit  
Data configuration  
Stop bit  
1 bit  
Parity check  
Delimiter  
None, odd, or even  
CR+LF, CR, LF  
NOTE 1. The shaded settings are the factory defaults.  
2. In the above table “none parity” can not be selected if the data bits are 7 bits in  
length. In this case, set the parity to either odd or even, or set the data bits to 8  
bits.  
TIP 1. DTR and RTS signals from the LSM will be ON immediately after power on.  
2. DSR signals to the LSM are always ignored.  
No. 99MBC095A  
6 - 7  
6.1.2.2 Connections  
(1) Connecting the RS-232C interface to a device specified as a terminal (DTE)  
Example 1 Flow control method (handshake method controlled by CTS, DSR, DTR, and RTS signals)  
LSM: specified as a terminal (DTE)  
Personal computer (PC-AT compatible)  
specified as a terminal (DTE)  
Signal name  
Pin No.  
Pin No.  
Signal name  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
DCD  
RxD  
TxD  
DTR  
SG  
RxD  
TxD  
DTR  
SG  
DSR  
RTS  
CTS  
RI  
DSR  
RTS  
CTS  
9-pin D-sub  
9-pin D-sub  
Example 2 Flow control method (handshake method controlled by CTS, DSR, DTR, and RTS signals)  
Personal computer (PC-9801)  
specified as a terminal (DTE)  
LSM: specified as a terminal (DTE)  
Signal name  
Pin No.  
Pin No.  
Signal name  
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
FG  
TxD  
RxD  
RTS  
CTS  
DSR  
SG  
RxD  
TxD  
DTR  
SG  
3
4
5
6
DSR  
RTS  
CTS  
7
8
DCD  
DTR  
20  
25-pin D-sub  
9-pin D-sub  
Example 3 3-Wire method (teletype protocol using TxD, RxD and SG)  
Personal computer (PC-AT compatible)  
specified as a terminal (DTE)  
LSM: specified as a terminal (DTE)  
Signal name  
Pin No.  
Pin No.  
Signal name  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
DCD  
RxD  
TxD  
DTR  
SG  
RxD  
TxD  
DTR  
SG  
DSR  
RTS  
CTS  
RI  
DSR  
RTS  
CTS  
9-pin D-sub  
9-pin D-sub  
6 - 8  
No. 99MBC095A  
6. INTERFACE UNIT  
(2) Connecting the RS-232C interface to a device specified as a modem (DCE)  
Example 1 Flow control method (handshake method controlled by CTS, DSR, DTR, and RTS signals)  
Device specified as a modem (DCE)  
LSM: specified as a terminal (DTE)  
Signal name  
Pin No.  
Pin No.  
Signal name  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
DCD  
RxD  
TxD  
DTR  
SG  
RxD  
TxD  
DTR  
SG  
DSR  
RTS  
CTS  
RI  
DSR  
RTS  
CTS  
9-pin D-sub  
9-pin D-sub  
Example 2) DPU-414: Printer (controlled by RTS signal)  
The DPU-414 series printer (Manufacturer: Seiko Electronics Co., Ltd.) should  
be connected as follows:  
DPU-414 series printer  
LSM: Defined as terminal (DTE)  
Signal name  
Pin No.  
Pin No.  
Signal name  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
TxD  
RxD  
*1  
RxD  
TxD  
DTR  
SG  
SG  
*1  
DSR  
RTS  
CTS  
RTS  
9-pin D-sub  
9-pin D-sub  
*1: Pin Nos. 4 and 6 of the printer-side connector are internally connected.  
*2: Possible to use a straight-type cable (In this case, it is not necesary to install wirings  
shown by the dotted lines) .  
NOTE 1. The signals names and pin assignment described here may be different from that  
of the user’s devices. Refer to the user’s manual of your own device when  
making connections.  
2. For this connection always use cables that have a shielding net. Both ends of this  
shielding net should be connected (grounded) to the RS-232C connector case.  
If the system malfunctions due to external interference noises or high frequency  
noise emitted by the system causes interference on radios, TVs, or other, use  
shielded wires with mesh.  
No. 99MBC095A  
6 - 9  
6.1.2.3 Printer interface  
• Depending on the basic setup the RS-232C port can be used as a printer port.  
• The applicable printer is a DPU-414 series manufactured by Seiko Electronics, Co., Ltd.  
Refer to the printer manual and establish the communication settings compatible to this  
instrument.  
Since this instrument is subjected to the following restrictions, select the optimal condi-  
tions on the printer side.  
1. Communication speed (baud rate)  
Set to 9600 bps. Select as much as possible 9600 bps, which is the factory setting, even  
though the supported speeds are from 1200 to 19200 bps.  
2. Line control  
On this instrument XON/XOFF control can not be used. Select the H/W BUSY control  
on the printer.  
3. Print mode  
On this instrument the output is made in a format of 40 columns/line. Always select the  
normal print mode (40 columns/line) on the printer.  
4. Setup command  
This can not be used on this instrument.  
5. International alphabet code  
This instrument always outputs ASCII codes.  
• The GP-IB interface can also be used at the same time.  
6.1.2.4 RS-232C/GP-IB commands  
• On this instrument either one of the RS-232C or GP-IB interfaces can be used. This  
selection must be made in the basic setup.  
• For the descriptions about the GP-IB interface refer to Section 6.2.4 "GP-IB Interface".  
The SRQ status bytes of GP-IB are that follow:  
bit7  
0
bit6  
RSV  
RSV  
RSV  
bit5  
0
bit4  
0
bit3  
0
bit2  
bit1  
0
bit0  
In the event of OK  
0
0
In the event of ERx  
0
0
0
1
Error No.  
GO  
In the event of data response  
0
0
1
0
NG  
1
RSV: Set to “1” according to a service request.  
NG: Set to “1” according to a ±NG measurement  
GO: Set to “1” according to a GO measurement  
• This section describes the reception commands used by the RS-232C and GP-IB interfaces  
and the response (transmission) commands that correspond to the reception commands.  
The data section of each command consists of ASCII codes.  
• The GP-IB commands includes additional “SRQ”, “NSRQ”, and “PR” commands.  
• Use the following command subscriptions, symbols and supplement descriptions when you  
read Section 6.1.2.5 “List of commands”.  
6 - 10  
No. 99MBC095A  
6. INTERFACE UNIT  
• Command symbols  
Meaning  
Symbol  
Entry of numeral  
sssssss  
aaa-bbb  
Segment number  
Start edge and finish edge of the edge specification  
aaa: Start edge, bbb: Finish edge  
Combination using numbers between 1 and 7  
Select a number between 1 and 255  
However, aaa should not be identical to bbb.  
±ddd.dddd  
Setup data or measured data  
Maximum of 7 significant digits  
Select a number between 0 and 9  
Select a number between 1 and 3  
Select a number between 0 and 9  
Select a number between 0 and 999  
Select a number between 0 and 9999  
Select a number between 0 and 999  
Select a number between 1 and 999  
2n(select between n=0 and 11)  
pp  
c
Program Number  
Analog output scale number  
r
Data output condition  
Periodical output timer value (sec)  
Invalidation period of automatic workpiece detection (msec)  
Number of measurement times of sample measurement  
Number of measurement times of automatic workpiece detection  
Number of scans for averaging  
ttt  
tttt  
nnn  
mmm  
nnnn  
nn  
pp  
∆
Group size subject to judgment  
Select a number between 0, 1, 2 and 99  
Select between 5% and 95%  
SHL (Threshold level) specification (%)  
Space character  
TIP 1. To ensure compatibility with the LSM-6100 Display Unit, this system ignores the  
following commands without treating them as ER6, but uses “OK”.  
• Memory switch command (UP0 uvxyz, UP1 uvxyz, UP2 uvxyz)  
• The MNL command is assumed to be identical to the MNH command.  
2. If the setup data is “0”, it allows the corresponding function to be disabled. To set  
“0” as a numerical value, use “0.0”.  
Example 1 “SET, PS0” ................... Preset function is disabled.  
Example 2 “SET, PS0.0” ................ Preset function is enabled.  
3. Setup data or measured data is denoted by ±ddd.dddd.  
• The first (most significant) digit is a sign. For commands that do not specifically  
designate the polarity, such as the calibration command, only a positive sign is  
accepted. However, these positive signs do not have to be specified.  
• Any decimal place is selectable.  
An integer can be entered without using a decimal point.  
4. “Ppp” command can be appended to the following commands to be treated as a  
single command: “SET”, “R”, “CR”, “STAT”, “RP”.  
Example: P00, R  
P06, STAT  
In order to change “Ppp” (5.Program Number) with “Pp”, which is compatible with  
old model, change the setting of Expanded basic setup from “7PRGM” to “10”.  
No. 99MBC095A  
6 - 11  
6.1.2.5 List of commands  
Reception command  
Item  
Response command  
GP-IB SRQ status byte  
0RSV000000  
LCM clear  
CL  
OK  
OK  
Metric (mm) unit system  
E (inch) unit system  
MM  
E
0RSV000000  
Program number change  
Pp  
OK  
OK  
0RSV000000  
0RSV000000  
Calibration  
HIGH CAL set  
LOW CAL set  
HC+ddd.dddd  
LC+ddd.dddd  
Segment  
Segment specification  
Edge specification  
SG sssssss  
SG aaa-bbb  
OK  
OK  
0RSV000000  
0RSV000000  
Setting the measurement  
interval number  
Number of scans for  
averaging at arithmetical  
average  
MN nnnn  
Measurement interval  
number at arithmetical  
average  
Number of scans for  
averaging at moving  
average  
MNH nnnn  
OK  
0RSV000000  
Storage of measuring conditions  
STR  
OK  
0RSV000000  
0RSV000000  
0RSV000000  
0RSV000000  
0RSV000001  
0RSV000000  
Key lock  
LOCK  
UNLOCK  
SHL pp  
RP  
OK  
Releasing key lock  
OK  
Setting the SHL for transparent object measurement *1  
Request of measuring conditions list  
OK  
(RP FORMAT)  
OK  
SET  
Setting the measuring conditions  
,SG sssssss  
,SG aaa-bbb  
Segment specification *2  
Edge specification  
,MN nnnn  
Number of scans for averaging at arithmetical  
average  
,MNH nnnn  
Number of scans for averaging at moving average  
,EL–ddd.dddd  
,EH–ddd.dddd  
,CNT aaa  
Lower abnormal limit *2  
Upper abnormal limit  
Count value  
,LL–ddd.dddd  
,LH–ddd.dddd  
Lower limit  
Upper limit  
*2  
,L1–ddd.dddd, Æ Æ Æ Æ,  
Multi-stage selection value  
,L6–ddd.dddd  
,N–ddd.dddd  
,LO–ddd.dddd  
,UP–ddd.dddd  
Target value  
Lower tolerance limit  
Upper tolerance limit  
,REF–ddd.dddd  
Reference value *3  
Scale value  
,SCL c  
,PS–ddd.dddd  
,PSM–ddd.dddd  
Positive preset  
Negative preset  
6 - 12  
No. 99MBC095A  
6. INTERFACE UNIT  
Reception command  
Item  
Response command  
GP-IB SRQ status byte  
,PR r  
OK  
0RSV000000  
Data output conditions  
,PRT ttt  
Periodic data output conditions  
Periodic output timer  
,SMP nnn  
Number of sample measurements  
Setting the statistical item for sample measurement  
(Maximum value, minimum value, range, mean)  
,(MAX,MIN,RNG,AVG)  
,GN nn  
Group sizes subject to judgment  
*2  
,GLL±ddd.dddd  
,GLH±ddd.dddd  
Lower tolerance limit for group judgment  
Upper tolerance limit for group judgment  
Statistical item for group judgment  
,(GMX,GMN,GAG,GRG)  
(Maximum value, minimum value, mean, range)  
Start of single-run measurement  
R
(DATA FORMAT)  
0RSV010NGGO1  
0RSV010NGGO1  
Continuous-run  
measurement  
Measurement start  
command  
CR  
(DATA FORMAT) *4  
Measurement stop  
command  
CL  
OK  
0RSV000000  
Zero-run measurement  
Measurement start  
command  
Measurement stop  
command  
R
No response command  
(DATA FORMAT)  
STOP  
0RSV010NGGO1  
Request of measurement data  
D
(DATA FORMAT)  
OK  
0RSV010001  
0RSV000000  
Statistical processing  
calculation  
Performs statistical  
processing  
ST  
Does not perform  
statistical processing  
NST  
OK  
OK  
Erasing the statistical  
processing memory  
Current program only  
All programs  
MC  
0RSV000000  
MCAL  
STAT  
Request of statistical processing results  
(STAT FORMAT)  
OK  
0RSV000001  
0RSV000000  
Condition setting of automatic workpiece detection *2  
• Number of measurement times  
• Invalidation period  
AUT  
,N mmm  
,D tttt  
• Lower detection limit  
• Upper detection limit  
,L±ddd.dddd  
,H±ddd.dddd  
Automatic workpiece detection control *2  
AUT, S  
RA  
OK  
0RSV000000  
0RSV000001  
Request of conditions list for automatic workpiece *2  
detection  
(RA FORMAT)  
GP-IB  
*5  
• Output to printer.  
• Perform service request.  
• Do not perform service request.  
PR  
SRQ  
NSRQ  
OK  
–
OK  
0RSV000000  
0RSV000000  
–
I/O timing signal  
–
ER7  
0RSV001111  
*1: • If "Performing the ultra-fine wire measurement" is specified in the basic setup (also on the LSM-500H), designating this command  
*1: • results in ER-6.  
*1: • Do not use the SHL command unnecessarily unless there is a need, since it adversely affects the measuring accuracy.  
*1: • In order to restore the standard threshold voltage, enter the following command:  
*1: • "SHL50"  
*1: • "STR"  
Resets to 50%, which is the standard.  
Records the value in memory.  
*2: Designating any command of the functions which are set to "Not used" in the basic setup will result in ER6.  
*3: If "Copying the target value to the reference value" is specified in the basic setup, designating this command results in ER6.  
*4: Responds with measurements according to the data output conditions.  
*5: Results in ER6 on the RS-232C.  
No. 99MBC095A  
6 - 13  
6.1.2.6 List of response commands if an error occurs  
Response command GP-IB SRQ status byte  
Description  
ER0  
A workpiece is not present in the specified segment.  
• A workpiece is not set properly.  
• Shutter is closed.  
0RSV001000  
ER2  
ER5  
A numeric value greatly different from the reference gage dimension is set.  
0RSV001010  
0RSV001101  
• Limit values for go/no-go judgment and abnormal data exclusion have been set in reverse  
order or equal.  
• Input value is too large.  
ER6  
An unavailable command is received.  
• Command format is incorrect.  
0RSV001110  
0RSV001111  
• Baud rate and/or data bits are not consistent.  
ER7  
ER9  
Message from the external device  
• Measurement is interrupted by signal input from key operation or I/O interface.  
Any error of communication  
• The communication setting of the opponent instrument is different from LSM.  
• Check the setup contents in the basic setup.  
• Isolate the cables from noise sources.  
Remark: “ER6” or “ER9” may occur in the first communication right after the start up. If this happens, repeat the command transmission of  
“CL” until the reception of “OK” is confirmed.  
6 - 14  
No. 99MBC095A  
6. INTERFACE UNIT  
6.1.2.7 Format of response commands  
1) (DATA FORMAT): Data format  
Ppp, (GO/NG judgment result) ±ddd.dddd (, deviation)  
a. Where the GO/NG judgment is active, GO/NG judgment result (-NG, OK∆ or +NG) will  
be appended.  
b. Where the reference value is set, a deviation (, DEV±ddd.dddd) is appended.  
This deviation value is derived from (Measured data - Reference value).  
c. In the simultaneous measurement the foreground measurement is followed by the  
background measurement after a comma (,) is inserted between them.  
2) (RP FORMAT): Report format  
PROGRAM, Ppp, SG∆ sssssss, MNnnnn, LL∆ ±ddd.dddd, LH∆ ±ddd.dddd, REF ±ddd.dddd,  
SCLc, PS∆ ±ddd.dddd, PR∆ r, PRTttt, SMPnnn, AVG, ST∆  
• It varies depending on the setup.  
a. Any characters are to be added if (target value + tolerance) is specified.  
b. Any characters are to be added if the multi-limit selection is specified.  
c. Any characters are to be added if the abnormal value eliminating function is specified.  
Between MM and LL∆ “EL∆ ±ddd.dddd, EH∆ ±ddd.dddd, CNTaaa” is inserted.  
d. On the GP-IB, SRQ (or NSRQ), LOCAL (or REMOT) is added after ST∆ depending on  
the operation mode.  
• Available symbols may change depending on the setup contents.  
a. SG∆ sssssss  
→ SG∆ aaa-bbb  
b. MNnnnn  
c. LL∆ ~ LH∆ ±ddd.dddd →  
→ MNHnnnn  
∆
N
∆
±ddd.dddd, LO∆ ±ddd.dddd, UP∆ ±ddd.dddd  
→ L1∆ ±ddd.dddd, .................. , L6∆ ±ddd.dddd  
→ PSM∆ ±ddd.dddd  
→ MAX, MIN or RNG  
→ NST  
e. PS∆ ±ddd.dddd  
f. AVG  
g. ST∆  
3) (STAT FORMAT): Statistical data format  
STAT∆ DATA, Ppp, Nnnnnnn, AVG±ddd.dddd, MAX±ddd.dddd, MIN±ddd.dddd,  
RNGddd.dddd,S.Dddd.dddd  
• “nnnnnn” implies the number of statistical data pieces, which is maximum 100,000. Data  
pieces that exceed this limit will be excluded from the statistical data.  
4) (RA FORMAT) : Data format for automatic workpiece detection AUT, Nmmm, Dtttt,  
L±ddd.dddd, H±ddd.dddd  
TIP 1. The integer section of “±ddd.dddd” will be zero-suppressed.  
2. The “±” section will be “-” if the value is negative, and will be removed (the follow-  
ing digits are left-flushed) if the value is positive.  
No. 99MBC095A  
6 - 15  
6.1.2.8 Other commands  
1) Each of the D, R, and CR commands can be appended with an “N”.  
If appended with an “N”, each program number will be removed from these commands.  
Item  
Reception command  
Data request  
DN  
Single-run measurement (zero-run measurement)  
Continuous-run measurement  
RN  
CRN  
Example: “D” → “P00, 12.3456” : Appended with a program number  
“DN” → “12.3456” : Program number is removed.  
2) Each of the D, R, CR, RP, STAT, and RA commands can be appended with an “*”.  
If appended with an “*”, these commands have a fixed data length that is not zero-sup-  
pressed.  
Item  
Reception command  
Data request  
*D  
*DN  
Single-run measurement (zero-run measurement)  
Continuous-run measurement  
*R  
*RN  
*CR  
*CRN  
Request of measuring conditions list  
*RP  
Request of statistical processing results  
*STAT  
*RA  
Request of automatic workpiece detection conditions list  
Example: “D” → “P00, 12.3456” : Zero suppressed.  
“*D” → “P00, +012.3456”  
: Outputted in 7 digits without zero suppressing.  
6 - 16  
No. 99MBC095A  
6. INTERFACE UNIT  
6.1.2.9 Details of command descriptions  
(1) CL  
(a) Format:  
CL  
(b) Description: Functions same as the  
key on the Display Unit.  
C
This releases the error state, performs single-run measurement, zero-run  
measurement, continuous-run measurement, and releases the measurement  
result display latch.  
(c) Example:  
(a) Format:  
Reception command  
Transmission command OK  
CL  
(2) MM, E  
MM  
E
(b) Description: MM: Sets the display unit to mm.  
E: Sets the display unit to E (inch).  
Reception command MM or E  
(c) Example:  
Transmission command OK  
(3)  
P
(a) Format:  
Ppp (pp: program number)  
(b) Description: Program number is changed to the specified one.  
(c) Example:  
Reception command  
P05  
Transmission command OK  
(4) HC, LC  
(a) Format:  
HC+ddd.dddd  
LC+ddd.dddd  
(b) Description: Calibrates the LSM.  
If the supplied gage is set in position and this command is executed, the  
proportion of the actually measured gage dimension to the entered value is  
calculated and the resultant constant is stored in memory, then the “OK”  
response will be issued. It requires several seconds.  
(c) Example:  
Reception command  
Reception command  
HC24.0005 Transmission command OK  
LC 0.9995 Transmission command OK  
(d) Supplement: Negative setup data results in ER2  
No. 99MBC095A  
6 - 17  
(5) SG sssssss, SG aaa-bbb  
(a) Format:  
SG sssssss (sssssss: SEG No. Number of digits should be between 1 and 7.  
Duplicated number must not be specified.)  
SG aaa-bbb (aaa: start edge, bbb: finish edge. The range is between 1 and 255  
for both edges. However, aaa should not be identical to bbb.)  
(b) Description: Setting the segment (measuring position).  
Two types of setting are available; segment specification and edge specification.  
Reception command SG2 Response command OK  
Reception command SG2-65 Response command OK  
(c) Example:  
(d) Supplement: • Segments and edges should be set in the basic setup.  
• sssssss can be set with 7 digits or less.  
Ex.) SG 1234567, SG 24, SG3, etc.  
• aaa and bbb should be set within 3 digits.  
Ex.) SG1-2, SG 2-33, SG 111-255, etc.  
The order of the start edge and finish edge can be reversed.  
(6) MN  
(a) Format:  
MN nnnn (nnnn: Number of scans, between 1 and 2048)  
(b) Description: Set the averaging method to the arithmetical average, and specify the number  
of scans to nnnn (2n, where n= 0 to 11).  
(c) Example:  
Reception command  
Response command  
MN 1024  
OK  
NOTE The number of scans must be between 16 and 2048 if the ultra-fine wire measure-  
ment is specified in the basic setup.  
(7) MNH  
(a) Format:  
MNH nnnn(nnnn: Number of scans, between 32 and 2048)  
(b) Description: Set the averaging method to the moving average, and specify the number of  
scans with nnnn. nnnn is 2n, where n= 5 to 11.  
(c) Example:  
Reception command  
Response command  
MNH 1024  
OK  
(d) Supplement: MNL command is as same as MNH command  
(8) STR  
(a) Format:  
STR  
(b) Description: Data that has been set by the RS-232C command will be erased from memory  
if the power is off. To retain the data after the power off, use this command to  
save the critical measuring conditions in memory. But the “ST” and “NST”  
command will not be saved.  
(c) Example:  
Reception command  
Response command  
STR  
OK  
(9) LOCK  
(a) Format:  
LOCK  
(b) Description: Locks the keyboard of this machine to prevent accidental operation.  
To release this key lock state, use the UNLOCK command.  
(c) Example:  
Reception command  
Response command  
LOCK  
OK  
(d) Supplement: Lock set by this command can not be released with key operation.  
6 - 18  
No. 99MBC095A  
6. INTERFACE UNIT  
(10) UNLOCK  
(a) Format:  
UNLOCK  
(b) Description: Releases the key lock state and enables key operations again.  
(c) Example:  
(a) Format:  
Reception command  
Response command  
UNLOCK  
OK  
(11) SHL  
SHL pp (pp: threshold level, 5 to 95%)  
(b) Description: If “Performing the ultra-fine wire measurement” is specified in the basic setup,  
designating this command results in ER6.  
Used to measure such as the width of a tape, which has a good transparency.  
(c) Example:  
Reception command  
Response command  
SHL 50  
OK  
(d) Supplement: Refer to Section 3.2.4.1, “Transparent object (Workpiece that transmits light)”.  
(12) RP (RP FORMAT)  
(a) Format:  
RP  
(b) Description: This is used to confirm the setup contents, if the measuring conditions and  
operating conditions set are received as the response.  
(c) Example:  
Reception command  
Response command  
RP command  
PROGRAM, SG∆ 2, M3, LL∆ D 5.988, LH∆ 6.010,  
REF6.000, SCL1, OF∆ 0, PR∆ 3, PRT0, SMP20, MAX,  
ST∆  
(13) SET  
(a) Format:  
SET  
Segment specification *1  
Edge specification *1  
, SG sssssss  
, SG aaa-bbb  
Number of scans for arithmetical average  
Measurement interval number at moving average  
Number of scans for moving average  
, MN nnnn  
, MS m  
, MNH nnnn  
Lower abnormal limit *2  
Upper abnormal limit *2  
Abnormal count value *2  
, EL±ddd.dddd  
, EH±ddd.dddd  
, CNT aaa  
Lower limit *1  
Upper limit *1  
, LL±ddd.dddd  
, LH±ddd.dddd  
, L1±ddd.dddd  
, L2 • • • •  
, L6±ddd.dddd  
Multi-limit selection value *1  
Target value *1  
Lower tolerance limit *1  
Upper tolerance limit *1  
, N±ddd.dddd  
, LO±ddd.dddd  
, UP±ddd.dddd  
Reference value *3  
Scale value  
, REF±ddd.dddd  
, SCLc  
Positive preset *4  
Negative preset *4  
Data output condition *5  
Periodic data output timer  
, PS±ddd.dddd  
, PSM±ddd.dddd  
, PRr  
, PRT ttt  
No. 99MBC095A  
6 - 19  
Number of sample measurements  
Sample measurement • Maximum value *6  
• Minimum value *6  
, SMP nnn  
, MAX  
, MIN  
• Range *6  
, RNG  
• Mean *6  
, AVG  
Group size subject to judgment *2  
, GN nn  
Lower tolerance limit of group judgment *2  
Upper tolerance limit of group judgment *2  
, GLL±ddd.dddd  
, GLH±ddd.dddd  
Statistical items for group judgment: Maximum value *2, 6 , GMX  
: Minimum value *2, 6 , GMN  
: Mean *2, 6  
: Range *2, 6  
, GAG  
, GRG  
(b) Description: This sets the measuring conditions.  
• Each of the commands that follow the SET command must be delimited by a  
comma (,).  
• A command which doesn’t need a setting change can be eliminated.  
• Approximately 0.5 second is required for this command to be processed.  
(c) Example:  
Reception command  
SET, SG2, M4, LL∆ 5.988, LH∆ 6.010, REF0  
*1: Select either setup method in the basic setup.  
*2: This is valid only if the function is specified in the basic setup.  
*3: This is valid only if the “Copying the target value to the reference value” is specified in  
the basic setup.  
*4: Set the reference gage on the Measuring Unit before sending this command. These  
commands will spend several seconds for processing. The settings of each function are  
as follows:  
• Positive preset: Presetting in the positive (0) direction.  
• Negative preset: Presetting in the negative (1) direction.  
*5: “PRr” is used to set the data output conditions for the RS-232C (printer)/GP-IB or  
Digimatic Output Unit. If the PR number is 1, 3 or 5, it is possible to set the periodic  
output timer, and the data output interval can be selected from 0 (for each measure-  
ment) and between 1 and 999 seconds.  
The PR numbers and the data output conditions have the following relationships.  
RS-232C  
GP-IB  
DCU  
Data output condition  
Printer  
Remark  
(PR No.)  
0
1
2
3
—
—
—
—
The periodical output timer can be set  
The periodical output timer can be set  
—
—
4
5
6
7
8
9
The periodical output timer can be set  
—
—
: Outputs data for each measurement.  
: Performs measurement and outputs data when a GO measurement results.  
: Performs measurement and outputs data when a ±NG measurement results.  
: No output  
—
*6: Only one of these statistical items can be specified.  
6 - 20  
No. 99MBC095A  
6. INTERFACE UNIT  
(14) R  
(a) Format:  
R
(b) Description: If the number of samples is set between 1 and 999, this command executes  
single-run measurement and transmits the measurement result in conformity  
with DATA FORMAT as the response command.  
(c) Example:  
Reception command  
Response command  
R
P00, 12.3456  
(15) CR, CL  
(a) Format:  
CR  
CL  
(b) Description: CR: If the number of samples is set between 1 and 999, this command executes  
continuous-run measurement. However, it does not respond to the “CR”  
command.  
• It transmits the measured results in conformity with DATA FORMAT for  
the response command.  
CL: Terminates continuous-run measurement.  
(c) Example:  
Reception command  
CR  
Response command  
None  
• Outputs as the response, the measurement results according to the data  
output conditions in conformity with DATA FORMAT.  
CL  
OK  
(16) R, STOP  
(a) Format:  
R
STOP  
(b) Description: R:  
If the number of samples is set to 0, this command executes zero-run  
measurement. However, it does not respond to “R” command.  
STOP:Terminates the zero-run measurement, and transmits the measurement  
results in conformity with DATA FORMAT as the response.  
(c) Example:  
Reception command  
R
STOP  
Response command  
P00, 12.3456  
(17) D  
(a) Format:  
D
(b) Description: Transmits as the response the last display of data in the ready state or latched  
data not in conformity with DATA FORMAT.  
This command is used to transmit the previous data, while the R command is  
used to execute measurement then the results are transmitted.  
(c) Example:  
Reception command  
Response command  
D
(DATA FORMAT)  
(18) ST, NST  
(a) Format:  
ST  
NST  
(b) Description: ST : Performs statistical processing. However, measurements obtained in the  
ready state will be omitted from the objectives of statistical processing.  
NST: Terminates the statistical processing.  
(c) Example:  
Reception command  
Response command  
ST or NST  
OK  
No. 99MBC095A  
6 - 21  
(19) MC, MCAL  
(a) Format:  
MC  
MCAL  
(b) Description: Both the MC and MCAL commands are used to clear the statistical memory.  
This operation is required before starting statistical processing.  
(c) Example:  
Reception command  
Response command  
MC or MCAL  
OK  
(20) STAT  
(a) Format:  
STAT  
(b) Description: Requests the statistical processing data. The statistical processing data will be  
cleared when the power is off.  
(c) Example:  
Reception command  
Response command  
STAT  
STAT∆ DATA, P00, N100, AVG12.0001,  
MAX12.0005, MIN11.9998, RNG0.0007, S.D0.00007  
(21) AUT  
(a) Format:  
AUT, Nmmm, Dtttt, L±ddd.dddd, H±ddd.dddd  
(b) Description: Set the conditions of automatic workpiece detection with the following data to  
follow “AUT” and delimited by a comma (,).  
Lower and upper detection limits for the position detection method do not  
require a “-” sign, so it will be ignored if specified.  
• Responds only when the automatic workpiece detection has been set in the  
basic setup.  
• N mmm (mmm: number of measurement times between 1 and 999. If “0” is  
specified, automatic workpiece detection is not performed.)  
• Dtttt (tttt: Invalidation period between 0 and 9999 ms)  
• L±ddd.dddd (±ddd.dddd: Lower detection limit)  
• H±ddd.dddd (±ddd.dddd: Upper detection limit)  
(c) Example:  
(a) Format:  
Reception command  
AUT, N50, D15, L9.5, H12.3  
Response command  
OK  
(22) AUT, S  
AUT, S  
(b) Description: Where “Performing the automatic workpiece detection” is specified in the basic  
setup, and if this command is received, “S” will be responded each time a  
workpiece is detected.  
If this setup is not made in the basic setup, designating this command results  
in ER6.  
(c) Example:  
Reception command AUT, S  
Response command OK  
(23) RA  
(a) Format:  
RA  
(b) Description: Transmits as the response the conditions of the automatic workpiece detection  
using RA FORMAT.  
(c) Example:  
Reception command  
Response command  
RA  
AUT, N50, D15, L9.5, H12.3  
6 - 22  
No. 99MBC095A  
6. INTERFACE UNIT  
(24) PR  
(a) Format:  
(b) Description: • Dedicated command for GP-IB.  
• Used to print the measured data on the optional printer.  
PR  
• It is necessary to set the RS-232C port to the printer port in the basic setup  
in advance. Without this setup, designating this command results in ER6.  
Reception command PR  
(c) Example:  
Response command None (printed on the printer)  
(25) SRQ, NSRQ  
(a) Format:  
SRQ, NSRQ  
(b) Description: • Dedicated command for GP-IB.  
• This is used to set up the service request transmission, according to the data  
condition or command receiving condition.  
• Using an SRQ, the interface unit performs a service request to the controller.  
With the NSRQ, the interface will not perform service request.  
• A response command will not be issued to this SRQ. Acknowledge if the  
response is OK with the SRQ status byte.  
• With the NSRQ, the interface will not perform service request. It will only  
respond with an "OK" command.  
(26) Timing signal  
If the measuring operation is interrupted by a command from the I/O interface or key operation,  
an ER7 will be responded to the RS-232C/GP-IB interface.  
This can be used as a timing signal to start a sequencer, etc.  
No. 99MBC095A  
6 - 23  
6.2 Optional Interface  
Into the option slot either of the Digimatic Code Output Unit, Second I/O Analog, BCD, and  
GP-IB Interface Units can be mounted.  
It is also possible to perform measurement with two Measuring Units at a time if the optional  
dual-type add-on unit is mounted on them.  
6.2.1 Digimatic Output Unit interface  
With the optional Digimatic Output Unit interface the LSM can be connected to the  
Digimatic Data Processor (DP-1VR) which uses the Mitutoyo-original data format for easy  
data collection and processing.  
In addition, as this LSM has two interface units, two pairs of measurements can be collected  
at a time, if the simultaneous measurement is specified.  
6.2.1.1 Method of use  
1) Installation and setup of the interface  
• Install the interface unit in the Display Unit. For the method of installation, refer to  
Section 6.3 “Installing the Optional Interface Unit”.  
• In the B6 mode of the basic setup, make the settings for the Digimatic Output Unit  
interface.  
: Uses only the OUTPUT-1 from the two interface units.  
Select this mode for single measurement.  
: Uses the OUTPUT-1 and OUTPUT-2 interface units.  
Select this mode when two Digimatic Output Units are used for simultaneous  
measurement.  
•
Set the data output conditions in the function setup.  
RS-232C  
Data output condition  
GP-IB  
DCU  
Printer  
Remark  
0
1
2
3
—
—
—
—
The periodical output timer can be set  
The periodical output timer can be set  
—
—
4
5
6
7
8
9
The periodical output timer can be set  
—
—
: Outputs data for each measurement.  
: Performs measurement and outputs data when a GO measurement results.  
: Performs measurement and outputs data when a ±NG measurement results.  
: No output  
—
6 - 24  
No. 99MBC095A  
6. INTERFACE UNIT  
2) Data output  
a. When a data send request comes from the external equipment such as the Digimatic Data  
Processor to the LSM, the measurement data will be outputted through this interface by  
the following timing.  
• When the DATA key on the Digimatic Data Processor is pressed  
• When the foot switch being connected to the Digimatic Data Processor is pressed.  
• When an REQ signal is inputted from other external equipment.  
b. When the measurement is initiated by pressing the  
key, or by receiving a RUN  
RUN  
input from the I/O interface or “R” command from the RS-232C/GP-IB interface, the  
measurement data will be outputted according to the data output conditions being set.  
6.2.1.2 Name of each part  
Connector  
DIGIMATIC CODEOUT  
9
10  
1
2
9
10  
1
2
OUTPUT-1  
OUTPUT-2  
Digimatic Output Unit 1 connector  
Digimatic Output Unit 2 connector  
Consisting of  
Digimatic Output unit  
Quantity  
1
1
Connecting cable  
No. 99MBC095A  
6 - 25  
6.2.1.3 I/O specifications  
The following are the I/O specifications of the Digimatic code output interface.  
1
2
9
• Applicable connector:  
7910-B500 (Manufacturer: 3M)  
XG4M-1030 (Manufacturer: Omron)  
10  
• Pin assignment  
Pin No.  
Signal name  
I/O direction  
Function  
GND  
DATA  
CK  
—
Out  
Out  
Out  
In  
Signal GND  
Data out  
1
2
Data transmission clock  
Data read request for external device  
Data output request from external device  
Spare  
3
RDY  
REQ  
I.C  
4
5
—
6~9  
10  
F.G  
—
Frame GND  
• Signal output circuit  
(by open collector)  
Pins No.2,3 and 4  
High: MAX 25V  
Low: 0.8V 20mA  
Inside of interface  
• Signal input circuitry  
20K  
20K  
Pin No.5  
High: MIN 3.5V  
Low: MAX 0.4V  
Inside of interface  
6 - 26  
No. 99MBC095A  
6. INTERFACE UNIT  
6.2.1.4 Timing chart  
1) When a data request is transmitted from a Digimatic data processor to the LSM  
RDY  
REQ  
Output level  
Output level  
DATA Output level  
CK Output level  
d1  
d2  
d3  
d4  
d13  
t1  
t2 t3 t4  
t1: 20 ms or less (measurement time if successively requested)  
t2: 0.2 to 1 ms  
t3: 0.2 to 1 ms  
t4: 0.2 to 1 ms  
2) When a data read request is transmitted from the LSM to the Digimatic data processor  
RDY  
REQ  
Output level  
Output level  
DATA Output level  
CK Output level  
d1  
d2  
d3  
d4  
d13  
t5 t6 t2 t3 t4  
0 < t5 < 2s  
t6: 0 to 120 ms  
t2: 0.2 to 1 ms  
t3: 0.2 to 1 ms  
t4: 0.2 to 1 ms  
TIP • The DP-series Digimatic Data Processor takes approximately 2 seconds for  
processing each data. Therefore, do not issue a data output request at an interval  
less than 2 seconds.  
• Data will not be outputted while an error message is shown on the LSM display.  
• If the Digimatic Data Processor shows an error message, check the number of  
digits (of the sent data) below decimal point. For detail refer to Section 6.2.1.5  
“Data format”.  
• If the DP-1VR is connected, set the “INTERFACE” setting of the DP-1VR to  
“COMPATIBLE”. For details, refer to the user’s manual of “DP-1VR”.  
No. 99MBC095A  
6 - 27  
6.2.1.5 Data format  
Digimatic data format consists of measured data which is made up of 13 hexadecimal digits  
using 0 to F, each 4 bits (of binary data) long. The data is output serially, starting from the  
LSB (Least Significant Bit) of the LSD (Least Significant Digit) to the MSB (Most Signifi-  
cant Bit) of the MSD (Most Significant Digit). The 13 digits have the following content.  
Digit  
Function  
Bit configuration  
d1  
d2  
d3  
d4  
F (1111)  
F (1111)  
F (1111)  
F (1111)  
Unassigned  
+ : 0 (0000)  
- : 8 (1000)  
d5  
Sign  
MSD  
d6  
d7  
d8  
Measured data  
d9  
(6 digits of BCD)  
d10  
d11  
LSD  
X 10 -0: 0 (0000)  
X 10 -1: 1 (0001)  
X 10 -2: 2 (0010)  
X 10 -3: 3 (0011)  
X 10 -4: 4 (0100)  
X 10 -5: 5 (0101)  
Decimal point  
position  
d12  
d13  
mm :  
inch :  
0 (0000)  
1 (0001)  
mm (+NG) : 2 (0010)  
mm (GO) : 3 (0011)  
mm (-NG) : 4 (0100)  
inch (+NG) : 5 (0101)  
inch (GO) : 6 (0110)  
inch (-NG) : 7 (0111)  
Unit  
(GO/±NG  
judgment results)  
An example of output data  
d1 d2 d3 d4 d5 d6 d7 d8 d9 d10 d11 d12 d13  
F
F
F
F
0
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
0
d5 d6~d11  
d12 d13  
+ 210765 x 10-4 mm  
→
+21.0765mm  
6 - 28  
No. 99MBC095A  
6. INTERFACE UNIT  
NOTE 1. Decimal Point Position  
The decimal point position will be adjusted as follows for the DP series data  
processor, which handles 6-digit data.  
• If the uppermost (7th) digit of the output data is 0, the lower six digits will be  
output.  
• If the uppermost (7th) digit of the output data is not 0, data “999999” will be  
output.  
• If six digits are in the decimal places, a “0” is output as a decimal point position.  
Example)  
Digimatic code output  
Display  
Transmitted data  
Decimal point position  
5.4321  
65.4321  
765.4321  
0.654321  
7.654321  
054321  
4
4
4
0
5
654321  
999999  
654321  
765432  
2. Data output at simultaneous measurement  
If two Digimatic Output Units are used in simultaneous measurement, outputs to  
each Digimatic Output Units are as follows:  
• OUTPUT-1: Data from program Nos. 0 through 4  
• OUTPUT-2: Data from program Nos. 5 through 9  
If a single Digimatic Output Unit is used, it must be connected to OUTPUT-1,  
through which data of the foreground program is outputted.  
No. 99MBC095A  
6 - 29  
6.2.2 Second Analog I/O Interface  
This interface deals with two pairs of GO/NG judgment result output, one set of analog  
output and control input. This is suitable for simultaneous measurement, multi-limit selection,  
and group judgment operations.  
6.2.2.1 Method of use  
1) Installation and setup of the interface  
• Install the interface unit in the Display Unit. For the method of installation, refer to  
Section 6.3 “Installing the Optional Interface Unit”.  
• In the basic setup make the settings according to the purpose of measurement. For detail  
refer to Section 4.1 “Basic Setup”.  
• In the function setup make the settings according to the purpose of measurement. For  
detail refer to Section 4.5 “Setting Up the Functions”.  
NOTE This interface has jumper pins (for short-circuiting between Pins 1 and 2 of JP1) on  
the upper surface of the board. However, never modify the existing setting, since this  
is for future expansion.  
6.2.2.2 Name of each part  
Jumper switch: JP1  
Connector 1 pin mark ( )  
Connector  
JP1  
3
1
TP3  
TP1  
TP2  
I/O ANALOG I/F  
18  
36  
1
19  
ALG 0V FG  
I/O  
Analog output connector  
I/O Interface connector  
Consisting of  
Second Analog I/O interface  
Quantity  
1
1
1
Connector  
Connecting cable  
6 - 30  
No. 99MBC095A  
6. INTERFACE UNIT  
6.2.2.3 I/O Interface  
This interface is used to communicate with a sequencer, a PC (programmable controller), or  
relay circuitry by means of sequential signals. The signal has negative-true logic (output level  
is LOW when control is ON). (Only Err-0 has positive-true logic.)  
1) Specifications  
• Pin assignment  
18  
1
Applicable connecter  
57-30360 (or the equivalent product by DDK or Amphenor, etc.)  
This is the standard accessory of this interface.  
36  
19  
a. Pin assignment  
Signal name  
+5V (Internal power)  
Signal name  
GND (Internal power)  
COM (IN)  
Pin No.  
1
I/O direction Pin No.  
I/O direction  
—
—
—
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
2
COM (IN)  
b0  
—
3
IN  
b1  
IN  
P0  
P2  
P4  
P1  
P3  
4
b2  
IN  
b3  
IN  
5
PRG  
IN  
B_L7  
PRINT  
RESET  
(A_GO)  
OUT  
IN  
6
SHIFT  
RUN  
IN  
7
IN  
IN  
T.RUN  
A_L1  
A_L3  
A_L5  
B_L1  
B_L3  
B_L5  
A_L7  
(A_L2)  
8
(A_-NG)  
(A_+NG)  
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
—
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
—
A_L2  
A_L4  
A_L6  
B_L2  
B_L4  
B_L6  
(A_L1)  
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
B_-NG GTJ_-NG  
B_+NG GTJ_+NG  
B_GO GTJ_GO  
A_+NG  
A_GO  
A_-NG  
ACK  
ER0  
STB  
COM (OUT)  
CNT  
COM (OUT)  
FG  
OUT  
—
No. 99MBC095A  
6 - 31  
NOTE • Between Pin No.8 and Pin No.32, between Pin No.15 and Pin No.26, between Pin  
No.2 and Pin No.20, and between Pin No.17 and Pin No.35 are connected  
internally.  
• When the 100 program method is selected, use the signal “b0” to “b3” and “PRG”  
to select the program number.  
• When the 10 program method is selected, use the signal “P0” to “P4” to select the  
program number.  
100 or 10 program method is selected in the Expanded Basic setup.  
• In single measurement judgment, results will be outputted to “A” and “B”.  
• In simultaneous measurement, judgment result from the program Nos.x0 to x4 will  
be outputted to “A”, and that from the program Nos.x5 to x9 will be outputted to  
“B”, respectively.  
• When group judgment is selected, each individual judgment result will be output-  
ted to “A”, and the group judgment result will be outputted to “GTJ” (“B”).  
• When “LL-LH” or “N-UL” method is selected, “+NG”, “GO”, “-NG” are used to  
output of judgment.  
• When “L1-L6” method is selected, “L1” to “L7” are used to output of judgment.  
Method of judgment is selected in the Basic setup.  
2) Input signal  
Description  
Signal  
RESET  
RUN  
Clears the result display or interrupts measurement.  
Used to start signal run measurement when “5 RUN” is set to “S.RUN” or “C.RUN”.  
Used to start and stop zero run measurement when “5 RUN” is set to “S.RUN” or “C.RUN”  
Used as “T.RUN” type input signal when “5 RUN” is set to “T.RUN”.  
They are selected by the Basic setup  
RUN + RESET  
Used to start continuous run measurement when “5 RUN” is set to “S.RUN” or “C.RUN”.  
/b0 to 3 + PRG  
/b0 to 3 + SHIFT + PRG  
To select program number Px0 to Px9.  
To select channel number P0x to P9x.  
/P0 to 4  
To select program number P0 to P4 when “7 PRGM” is set to “10”.  
To select program number P5 to P9 when “7 PRGM” is set to “10”.  
SHIFT + /P0 to 4  
SHIFT + RUN  
PSET: Presetting will be performed using the already set preset value and preset direction  
If those Preset conditions are not set, zero-setting in.  
HOLD: Can be set as “HOLD” signal by the basic setup (“5 PSET”).  
PRINT  
Used to printout the measurement result when “4 RS-232C” is set to “PRN” by the basic setup.  
The statistical processing results will be printed, and then all statistical memory will be cleared.  
The “ER7” command will be output from the RS-232C. Use this as a timing signal.  
PRINT + RESET  
SHIFT + RESET  
NOTE All input signal must be off before the new input signal is on.  
During measurement only “RESET”, “RUN” (as stop), “PRINT” or “HOLD” signals are  
accepted.  
6 - 32  
No. 99MBC095A  
6. INTERFACE UNIT  
3) Input signal to select program number  
/b0  
Off  
On  
Off  
On  
Off  
On  
Off  
On  
Off  
On  
Off  
On  
Off  
On  
Off  
On  
Off  
On  
Off  
On  
/b1  
off  
off  
on  
/b2  
off  
off  
off  
off  
on  
/b3  
off  
off  
off  
off  
off  
off  
off  
off  
on  
/SHIFT /PRG  
Description  
off  
off  
off  
off  
off  
off  
off  
off  
off  
off  
on  
on  
on  
on  
on  
on  
on  
on  
on  
on  
on  
on  
on  
on  
on  
on  
on  
on  
on  
on  
on  
on  
on  
on  
on  
on  
on  
on  
on  
on  
Select program number Px0  
Select program number Px1  
Select program number Px2  
Select program number Px3  
Select program number Px4  
Select program number Px5  
Select program number Px6  
Select program number Px7  
Select program number Px8  
Select program number Px9  
Select channel number P0x  
Select channel number P1x  
Select channel number P2x  
Select channel number P3x  
Select channel number P4x  
Select channel number P5x  
Select channel number P6x  
Select channel number P7x  
Select channel number P8x  
Select channel number P9x  
on  
off  
off  
on  
on  
on  
on  
on  
off  
off  
off  
off  
on  
off  
off  
off  
off  
off  
off  
on  
on  
off  
off  
off  
off  
off  
off  
off  
off  
on  
on  
off  
off  
on  
on  
on  
on  
on  
off  
off  
off  
off  
on  
NOTE All input signal must be off before the new input signal is on.  
However, signal “b0” to “b3” and “SHIFT” is able to be on before signal “PRG” is on.  
4) Output signal  
Signal  
A_-NG, A_GO,  
A_+NG  
Description  
• Output of GO/-NG judgment result when “1 JDG.M” is set to “LL-LH” or “N-UL”.  
• And multi-limit judgment result when “1 JDG.M” is set to “L1-L6”.  
• Data for program Px0 to Px4 will be output in the simultaneous-program measurement.  
A_L1_to_L7  
B_-NG, B_GO,  
B_+NG  
• Output of GO/-NG judgment result when “1 JDG.M” is set to “LL-LH” or “N-UL”.  
• And multi-limit judgment result when “1 JDG.M” is set to “L1-L6”.  
• The output signal is equivalent to “A” in the signal-program measurement.  
• Data for program Px5 to Px9 will be output in the simultaneous-program measurement.  
• Single or simultaneous-program measurement are selected by basic setup (“2 PROG”).  
B_L1_to_L7  
ER0  
• This is usually set to ON (LOW level) but turns to OFF (HIGH level) when a segment  
error occurs.  
• Outputs the results of group in group judgment. (Basic setup “3 GTJ”=“USE”)  
GTJ_-NG, GTJ_GO,  
GTJ_+NG  
ACK  
• This is set to ON (LOW level) during measurement (single-run or continuous-run).  
• Before outputting a judgment result, this will be output (Low) as a cofirming signal.  
STB  
• Turns Low level if abnormal data to be discarded occurred successively.  
• It is need the setting of “2 CNT” by Function setup. And “3 ADE” is set to “USE” or  
“USE2” by Basic setup.  
CNT  
No. 99MBC095A  
6 - 33  
• Input circuitry  
2.2K(1W)  
COM (IN): External supply  
(5~24V)  
voltage terminal  
Input signal  
• Output circuitry  
Output signal (30V,10mA or less)  
COM (OUT)  
5) Power supply for external devices (+5V, GND)  
This terminal supplies 5V 100mA for input signal. This is able to use only testing for input  
signals.  
6) Example for Switch and LED lamp  
COM (IN)  
2
+
+
+
–
+NG  
-NG  
14  
32  
15  
35  
GO  
COM (OUT)  
S.RUN or T.RUN  
RUN  
7
RESET  
RESET  
25  
RUN+RESET (C.RUN)  
10EDA10 (Nihon Inter Electronics)  
6 - 34  
No. 99MBC095A  
6. INTERFACE UNIT  
7) Example for PLC (Programmable Logic sequence Controller)  
COM (IN)  
2
+COM (IN)  
INPUT  
GO 15  
ACK 33  
STB 34  
INPUT  
+
–
INPUT  
RUN  
RESET 25  
COM (OUT)  
LSM 2nd I/O  
7
OUTPUT  
OUTPUT  
35  
–COM (OUT)  
PLC  
• The input of PLC must be plus common type.  
The output of PLC must be minus common type.  
• There must be Transistor type input or output. Do not use Reray type.  
8) Example for High sensitivity relay  
+
+
Lamp  
or  
Buzzer  
–
K1  
D1  
–
14  
32  
35  
+NG  
–NG  
K1  
COM (OUT)  
D1: 10EDA10 (Nihon Inter Electronics)  
TIP • When Err-0 occurs, judgment output are all set to OFF.  
• The single-run measurement and zero-run measurement will be interrupted by Err-  
0 and the measurement mode will be terminated without outputting the results.  
• During the continuous-run measurement, the ACK is set to ON, even if an Err-0  
occur. Measurement continues after the error is rectified.  
No. 99MBC095A  
6 - 35  
9) I/O timing chart  
• Single-run measurement  
TIN  
Program  
number  
TIN  
RESET  
TIN  
TIN  
TIN  
RUN  
ACK  
STB  
TBO  
TAD  
TSO  
TAD  
TDO  
Judgment  
• Zero-run measurement  
TIN  
RESET  
TIN  
TIN  
TIN  
RUN  
TAD  
TAD  
ACK  
STB  
TSO  
TAD  
TDO  
Judgment  
• Continuous-run measurement  
TIN  
Program  
number  
TIN TIN  
RUN  
TIN  
TIN  
RESET  
TAD  
TAD  
ACK  
TBO  
TBC  
TBC  
STB  
TSO  
TAD  
TDO  
Judgment  
• Continuous-run measurement with term specification  
TIN  
RESET  
T
W
RUN  
ACK  
STB  
TAD  
TAD  
TAD  
TBO  
TBC  
TSO  
TBC  
TDO  
Judgment  
6 - 36  
No. 99MBC095A  
6. INTERFACE UNIT  
• Timing of HOLD input (at continuous-run measurement)  
TIN  
Program  
number  
TIN TIN  
RESET  
TIN  
TIN  
RUN  
TAD  
TAD  
ACK  
TBO  
TBC  
TSO  
STB  
TAD  
TDO  
TDO  
Judgment  
HOLD  
TIN or more  
• Response time  
Item  
Response time  
Description  
TIN  
TAD  
Ter  
> (Tif x 2 + 3 ms)  
Input time  
< (Tif x 2 + 3 ms)  
< (Tif / 2)  
Acceptance time  
Permission of error of same-timing  
Delay time by filter  
Tif  
5 ms, 2 ms, 20 ms  
Can be selected by Expanded basic setup (“7 IFF”)  
Refer to next page, Strobe length (TSO).  
0.05 ms to 0.2 ms  
TSO  
TDO  
TBO  
Strobe length  
Data setup time  
< (Tmr x N + 3 ms)  
Duration of Single-run measurement  
“Tmr x 2” might increase for dual unit measurement.  
TBC  
TBD  
Tmr  
N
< (Tmr x N + 1 ms)  
Duration of continuous-run measurement  
Duration of ready state  
< (Tmr + 1 ms)  
Refer to next page, Measurement interval (Tmr).  
Measurement interval  
Refer to Section 9.2.4, Number of samples (“6 SMP N”).  
Number of samples (SMP N)  
And refer to Section 4.5.3.8, Number of samples (“6 SMP N”).  
NOTE In order to input multiple signals at same time, the interval between the input signals  
must be “Ter” or less.  
No. 99MBC095A  
6 - 37  
• Measurement interval (Tmr) and Strobe length (TSO)  
Number of scans for  
averaging: MR  
Measurement interval: Tmr  
(for Series LSM-500S)  
Strobe length: Tso  
2048  
1024  
512  
256  
128  
64  
640 ms ± 20 %  
320 ms ± 20 %  
160 ms ± 20 %  
80 ms ± 20 %  
40 ms ± 20 %  
20 ms ± 20 %  
10 ms ± 20 %  
5 ms ± 20 %  
20 ms ± 20 %  
2 ms ± 20 %  
32  
16  
8
2.5 ms ± 20 %  
0.3 ms ± 20 %  
for Moving average  
excluded first averaging of  
measurement  
2 ms ± 20 %  
5 ms ± 20 %  
NOTE • Might increase the timing value by the lord of circuit.  
• “Tso” is able to select fixed value “0.1 ms” to “100 ms” by Expanded basic setup  
(“7 STB”)  
It is only effect in the Single-run-measurement, Zero-run-measurement and  
continuous-run-measurement.  
6 - 38  
No. 99MBC095A  
6. INTERFACE UNIT  
6.2.2.4 Analog output  
Measurement results will be outputted as full-scale ±5V analog signals.  
LSM has two analog outputs. First is standard analog I/O interface. Second is this optional  
2nd Analog I/O interface.  
1) Specification  
• Pin assignment  
ALG 0V FG  
Pin No.  
Signal name  
Description  
Analog output terminal  
1
2
3
ALG  
0V  
Analog 0V terminal  
FG  
Frame ground (grounding terminal)  
• Output circuit  
560Ω  
ALG  
0V  
a. Range of analog output voltage is ±5V.  
b. The accuracy of the analog output voltage is 0.2% of its full scale.  
c. This analog output must be connected to a device that has an input impedance of 1 ΜΩ  
or greater. If the input impedance is low, the output accuracy will be reduced.  
2) Method of use  
• Set a proper reference value and scale value in the function setup. However, if “Copying  
the target value to the reference value” is set in the basic setup, set the target value instead  
of reference value.  
• (Analog output) = (Measured data) - (Reference value) x (gain)  
For detail refer to Section 4.5.3.4 “F3: Setting the reference value”.  
• In the normal measurement mode, first and second analog output is same output data.  
• In the simultaneous mode, the analog output of program Px0 to Px4 will be made via the  
first, and that of program Px5 to Px9 will be made via the second.  
• Set the analog output voltage in the event of Err-0 by the basic setup (“1 ERR-0V”).  
NOTE 1. Always use a braided shielding wire cable as the analog cable, and positively  
ground the braided shielding wire to the FG terminal.  
2. If wiring the Analog output connector, do not directly touch the output terminals by  
hand, which has static charges, because the internal circuit may be damaged by  
static discharge. Discharge the static energy by touching the metallic surface of  
the Display unit in advance. In addition, unplug the power cord from the outlet  
before commencing wiring.  
3. After wiring has been completed, close the protective cover.  
No. 99MBC095A  
6 - 39  
6.2.3 BCD interface  
This interface outputs data in parallel format. The output data consists of a positive true  
logic/negative true logic signal and a decimal number (BCD)/Hexadecimal number (HEX).  
6.2.3.1 Method of use  
1) Installation and setup of the interface  
• By referring to Section 6.2.3.3 “Specification”, set the jumper switches and DIP switches  
to meet the purpose of measurement.  
• Install this interface unit in the Display Unit. For the installation method, refer to Section  
6.3 “Installing the Optional Interface Unit”.  
6.2.3.2 Name of each part  
Jumper switch: JP3  
Connector 1 pin mark ( )  
Connector  
Jumper switch: JP2  
Jumper switch: JP1  
DIP switch: SW1  
BCD I/F  
18  
36  
1
19  
BCD interface connector  
Consisting of  
Quantity  
BCD interface  
1
1
1
Connector (57-30360)  
Connecting cable  
6 - 40  
No. 99MBC095A  
6. INTERFACE UNIT  
6.2.3.3 Specification  
1) BCD specifications  
• Pin assignment  
18  
1
19  
36  
Signal name  
Signal name  
Signal name  
Pin No.  
Pin No.  
Pin No.  
25  
1
2
1
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
1
1
2
2
26  
2
X 10 0  
X 10 3  
X 10 6  
3
4
4
27  
4
}
}
}
4
8
1
8
1
28  
8
5
29  
Err-0 (segment error)  
6
2
2
30  
HOLD (input)  
X 10 1  
X 10 4  
7
4
4
31  
F/R (Switching foreground / background)  
STB (strobe output)  
}
}
8
8
1
8
1
32  
9
33  
EXT.Vcc (power supply for external device)  
+POLE (polarity display)  
GND (signal GND)  
10  
11  
12  
2
2
34  
X 10 2  
X 10 5  
4
4
35  
}
}
8
8
36  
FG (Frame GND)  
• Applicable connector  
57-30360 (or the equivalent product by DDK or Amphenor, etc.)  
This is the standard accessory of this interface.  
No. 99MBC095A  
6 - 41  
2) Selection of functions to be used  
• Selection of jumper switches  
1 PIN  
JP3  
3 PIN  
JP1  
JP2  
3 PIN  
1 PIN  
Make between No. 1 and 2 pins  
or between No.2 and 3 pins  
short-circuited using  
a short-circuiting plug.  
Select a positive true logic/negative true logic signal and a decimal number (BCD)/  
Hexadecimal number (HEX) for the data output.  
Jumper pin No.  
Jumper setting  
Function  
Positive-true logic  
Short-circuiting between 1 and 2  
(factory setting)  
JP1  
Short-circuiting between 2 and 3  
Negative-true logic  
Short-circuiting between 1 and 2  
(factory setting)  
Output of a decimal number (BCD)  
JP2  
JP3  
Note  
Short-circuiting between 2 and 3  
Output of a hexadecimal number (HEX)  
Negative-true logic  
For future expansion, Always short-circuit  
between 1 and 2.  
Short-circuiting between 1 and 2  
(factory setting)  
Short-circuiting between 2 and 3  
Note: Outputs the displayed measured data in a hexadecimal number (HEX)  
• DIP switch settings  
Circuit No.  
Switch setting  
OFF (factory setting)  
ON (prohibited)  
OFF (factory setting)  
ON  
Function  
For future expansion. Never turn to ON, otherwise an operation  
error occurs.  
Circuit 1  
Uses the external power supply.  
Circuit 2Note 1  
Circuit 3Note 1  
Uses internal power and +5V power supply (max. 100 mA)  
Separates between the internal and external grounds.  
Connects between the internal and external grounds.  
OFF (factory setting)  
ON  
Note 1: Settings of Circuits 1 and 2 should be identical, disregarding it is ON or OFF. These two circuits do  
not function if inconsistently set (disregarding ON or OFF).  
NOTE Circuits 2 and 3 of the DIP switch  
Do not turn the circuits 2 and 3 to ON as much as possible except when it is un-  
avoidable because any external power supply can not be used. If doing so, malfunc-  
tion may occur due to electrical interference.  
6 - 42  
No. 99MBC095A  
6. INTERFACE UNIT  
3) Output signal  
External power supply: Vcc  
(5~24 V)  
R
SW1: Circuit 3  
Internal GND  
Internal circuit  
External GND  
• Positive-true logic output by open collector  
Voltage: 30V max., Drawing current: 10 mA max.  
• External resistance R: (Vcc /10) KΩ ≤ R≤ 10 kΩ  
Pin No.  
Signal name  
Remarks  
1~28  
DATA  
Output of 7-digit measurement data (possible to select whether by  
positive-true logic or by negative-true logic)  
29  
32  
34  
ERR-0  
STB  
Output of segment error (positive-true logic)  
Output of strobe (acknowledgment) (negative-true logic)  
+POLE  
Output of sign  
• HIGH level: Positive (+) data  
• LOW level: Negative (-) data  
4) Input signal  
Internal power +5V  
External power supply: Vcc  
(5~24 V)  
SW1: Circuit 2  
10K  
F/R, HOLD  
SW1: Circuit 3  
Internal GND  
Internal circuit  
External GND  
Remarks  
Pin No.  
Signal name  
30  
HOLD  
• Does not hold the data when the circuit is open or the line level falls to LOW.  
• When the line level rises to HIGH, the previous data will be held (latched)  
• and the update does not take place. In order to read the data at a desired  
• point in time irrespective of the STB signal, start the read at least 500 µs after  
• the input of HOLD signal.  
31  
F/R  
This is valid in simultaneous measurement.  
• Selects F (foreground program No.) when the circuit is open or the line level  
• falls to LOW.  
• Selects R (background program No.) when the line level rises to HIGH.  
No. 99MBC095A  
6 - 43  
• Example A: Connect to logic  
R
OUTPUT  
INPUT  
+
–
GND  
GND  
LSM BCD  
Input of logic type equipment  
EXT.Vcc  
INPUT  
Vcc  
OUTPUT  
+
–
GND  
GND  
LSM BCD  
Output of logic type equipment  
• Example B: Connect to PLC (Programmable Logic sequence Controller)  
+COM (IN)  
INPUT  
EXT.Vcc  
DATA_0  
ER0  
33  
1
INPUT  
29  
32  
+
INPUT  
STB  
–
COM (OUT)  
COM (OUT)  
HOLD  
F/R  
30  
31  
35  
COM (OUT)  
GND  
PLC  
LSM BCD  
• The input of PLC must be plus common type.  
The output of PLC must be plus common type.  
• There must be Transistor type input or output. Do not use Reray type.  
6 - 44  
No. 99MBC095A  
6. INTERFACE UNIT  
5) Timing chart  
• BCD : Ready state in normal measuring mode.  
H
L
HOLD  
BCD DATA  
STB  
H
L
TSO  
TIN  
TIN  
TBD  
TBD  
TBD  
TBD  
TBD  
• BCD : Ready state in simultaneous measuring mode.  
H
L
F/R  
BCD DATA  
STB  
Fore-ground  
Back-ground  
Fore-ground  
Back-ground  
H
L
TIN  
TIN  
TBD  
TBD  
TBD  
TBD  
• BCD: Ratch state in simultaneous measuring mode.  
H
L
F/R  
BCD DATA  
STB  
Fore-ground  
Back-ground  
Fore-ground  
H
L
TAD  
TAD  
Refer to Section 6.2.2.3 for TBD, TIN, Tso, and TAD.  
TIP 1. Data output timing  
• Input signals (F/R, HOLD) will be checked just before starting the data output.  
• In the continuous-run-measurement, “TBC” is instead of “TBD” for timing chart.  
• In the event of Err-0, data of “0” will be output.  
• During a setup mode, output data is indefinite.  
2. While the HOLD signal is on, measured data will be kept.  
3. Note that meaningless data may be outputted, if the F/R signal is switched in a  
single measurement (not a simultaneous measurement).  
4. By the F/R signal it is possible to switch between the foreground and background  
data during the display is latched.  
No. 99MBC095A  
6 - 45  
6.2.4 GP-IB interface  
• This interface unit conforms to the IEEE standard 488-1978.  
• The subset of this interface does not include the controller function. Consequently, it can  
not output data directly to a printer with a GP-IB interface.  
6.2.4.1 Method of use  
1) Installation and setup of the interface  
• By referring to Section 6.2.4.3 “Specification”, set my-address and delimiter.  
• Install this interface unit in the Display Unit. For the installation method, refer to Section  
6.3 “Installing the Optional Interface Unit”.  
6.2.4.2 Name of each part  
Connector 1 pin mark ( )  
Connector  
GP-IB I/F  
12  
24  
1
1
8
13  
DIP switch  
GP-IB Interface connector  
Consisting of  
Quantity  
GP-IB interface  
Connecting cable  
1
1
6 - 46  
No. 99MBC095A  
6. INTERFACE UNIT  
6.2.4.3 Specification  
1) Specification  
• Pin assignment  
12  
1
24  
13  
Pin No.  
Signal name  
Pin No.  
13  
Signal name  
DI01  
DI02  
DI05  
DI06  
1
2
14  
DI03  
DI07  
3
15  
DI04  
DI08  
4
16  
EOI  
REN  
5
17  
DAV  
GND  
6
18  
NRFD  
NDAC  
IFC  
GND  
7
19  
GND  
8
20  
GND  
9
21  
SRQ  
GND  
10  
11  
12  
22  
ATN  
GND  
23  
F.G. (Frame GND)  
GND (Signal GND)  
24  
• Applicable connector  
IEEE-488 based.  
2) DIP switch settings  
ON  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Delimiter:  
The above example sets to "CR+LF+EOI".  
My address:  
The above example sets the address to "2".  
(0-1 EH are available in hexadecimal number)  
• List of delimiters  
Circuit  
Delimiter  
6
7
8
ON  
ON  
OFF  
ON  
ON  
OFF  
OFF  
ON  
OFF  
ON  
ON  
OFF  
ON  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
CR+LF  
CR  
LF  
CR+LF & EOI  
CR & EOI  
LF & EOI  
EOI  
No. 99MBC095A  
6 - 47  
TIP • What is “My address” ?  
Each of the commonication devices which are on the same GP-IB has an specific  
address (number) with which it is identified.  
• What is a “delimiter” ?  
The delimiter is a signal (or a set of signals) that represents the end of the data.  
6 - 48  
No. 99MBC095A  
6. INTERFACE UNIT  
6.2.4.4 Functions  
The GP-IB interface functions include the following.  
Interface function  
Application  
Function  
SH1:  
Functions to synchronize transmission with the data bus operation  
by handshaking with a device equipped with an AH function  
—
Source Handshake  
AH1:  
Functions to synchronize reception with the data bus operation by  
handshaking with a device equipped with an SH function  
—
Acceptor Handshake  
T6:  
Basic Talker  
Serial Poll  
Function to transmit data for other devices  
Talker  
Function to transmit a status byte, which represents the talker  
condition, for the controller  
Cancelling talker by Function for automatically canceling the talker function and setting  
MLA.  
the listener function by MLA message.  
L4:  
Basic Listener  
Function to receive data from another device  
Listener  
Cancelling listener Function for automatically canceling the listener function and  
by MTA.  
setting the talker function by MTA message.  
Function to inform the controller of an event occasion, and, as a  
consequence, request special service from the controller  
SR1:  
—
Service Request  
Function to select the method of device control; either by local  
(manual) or interface information  
RL1:  
Basic Remote Local  
Local Lockout  
—
Remote Local  
Function to prohibit the device from returning to the local mode.  
Function to prompt the selected device to execute a specified  
operation  
DT1:  
Device Trigger  
TIP What is “serial poll” ?  
• The controller which receives an SRQ (Service Request) will call the talkers that it  
assumes are transmission sources. When the addressed talker transmits a status  
byte (8-bit data) back to the controller to represent the talker condition, the control-  
ler will check each byte to identify the source talker.  
When the controller calls a talker for this purpose, it sends an SPE (Serial Poll  
Enable) to the talker to discriminate from general addressing to the talker.  
• SRQ status byte  
In the serial poll state the GP-IB interface unit indicates the reason for issuing an  
SRQ with the following bit contents:  
bit contents  
bit7  
(MSB)  
bit0  
(LSB)  
bit6  
bit5  
bit4  
bit3  
bit2  
bit1  
Item  
OK  
0
0
0
RSV  
RSV  
RSV  
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
ERROR  
DATA  
Error No.  
GO  
NG  
• RSV becomes “1” when this interface is in the service request state.  
No. 99MBC095A  
6 - 49  
6.2.4.5 Operations  
1) The GP-IB interface unit for the LSM is basically a listener that receives various com-  
mands, and a talker that transmits response commands. For further information on recep-  
tion commands and response commands, refer to the description in Sec. 6.1.2.4.  
2) When receiving an IFC (Inter Face Clear), the GP-IB interface is initialized.  
• Remote state will be canceled to local state.  
• Local lockout state (LLO) will be canceled.  
• Service request (SRQ) transmission will be disabled.  
3) When the GP-IB interface receives an REN (Remote ENable) signal followed by other  
commands, the interface enters the remote state. In the remote state, only the  
can be operated.  
key  
C
4) When the GP-IB interface receives an LLO (Local LOckout) as a multi-statement and  
other commands, the interface enters into local lockout state. In this local lockout state, all  
the key operations are prohibited.  
(This state can be released by inputting an IFC (Inter Face Clear) from the host computer.)  
5) However in the remote state or local lockout state, I/O operations, except for key entries,  
will operate as usual.  
6) When the GP-IB interface receives a GET command) as a multi-statement, the single-run  
measurement or zero-run measurement will commence.  
Zero-run measurement can be terminated by inputting another GET command.  
7) This interface unit (as a talker) does not output unless a transmission command has been  
received.  
8) When this interface unit receives an SRQ command, it is ready to transmit the service  
request and the SRQ lamp lights.  
• When this interface transmits a response (sending data from this interface), send a  
service request signal (SRQ) to ready the controller for data reception.  
• When the GP-IB interface receives an SPE (Serial Poll Enable) from the controller, the  
interface outputs the SRQ status byte on the data bus, which describes the content of  
the request.  
• In the service request state, the interface does not output the OK or ER0 – 7 commands  
as a response command, but only sends the SRQ status byte to describe the conditions.  
9) Just after power on transmit a “CL” command as the first communication command and  
repeat this until a response of “OK” is received.  
6.2.5 Dual-type add-on unit  
With this dual-type add-on unit it is possible to perform dual-unit measurement using the  
same model of two Measuring Units at once.  
On detail specification and installation, please refer to the user's manual of the dual type add-  
on unit.  
6 - 50  
No. 99MBC095A  
6. INTERFACE UNIT  
6.3 Installing the Optional Interface Unit  
For this system it is possible to select either of the Second Analog I/O, BCD, and GP-IB  
interfaces, as well as one dual-type add-on unit and one Digimatic Output Unit concurrently.  
When installing in the Display Unit the above listed units use the same procedure as shown  
below.  
Observe the following to avoid electric shock.  
1. If an optional interface needs to be installed inside the Display Unit, unplug the  
power cord from the inlet and put the power switch in the OFF position, then pull  
off the key switch.  
CAUTION  
2. Do not remove the protective cover on which the seal is stuck to. Otherwise, an  
electric shock may result.  
3. Do not remove the seal, shown at the left.  
1) Safety check  
• Turn the power key switch to off position (marked as “O”), then remove the key switch.  
• Unplug the power cord from the inlet on the rear panel of the Display Unit.  
Dual-type add-on unit  
I/O, BCD, GP-IB  
Digimatic Output Unit  
Protection plate  
2) Removing the cover  
Remove four screws on both sides of the cover and take out the cover.  
No. 99MBC095A  
6 - 51  
3) Installing the interface  
• If installing more than two optional interfaces, install them in the order below:  
a. Digimatic Output Unit  
b. Second Analog I/O, BCD, or GP-IB interface  
c. Dual-type add-on unit  
• Remove the protection plate from where each interface is to be installed.  
• Install each interface unit inside the display unit following 6.3.1 through 6.3.2.  
• Be sure to tighten the fixing screws of each interface unit.  
4) Replacing the cover  
Replace the cover which has been removed at step (2) and fit it with four screws.  
6.3.1 Digimatic Output Unit  
• Using the provided connecting cable, connect the Digimatic Output Unit to connector  
CN14.  
• Fit the connecting cable to the cut on the connector CN14 and firmly connect them.  
• Firmly tighten the Digimatic Output Unit mount plate with two screws as shown.  
Digimatic Output Unit  
CN14  
Cut on CN14  
Connect the connecting cable to CN14.  
6.3.2 Second Analog I/O, BCD, and GP-IB interfaces  
• Using the provided connecting cable, connect the interface unit to connector CN9.  
• Fit the connecting cable to the cut on the connector CN9 and firmly connect them.  
• Firmly tighten the Interface Unit mount plate with two screws as shown.  
Interface unit  
CN9  
Cut on CN9  
Connect the connecting cable to CN9  
6 - 52  
No. 99MBC095A  
INSPECTION AND  
MAINTENANCE  
This chapter describes the method of maintenance and troubleshooting, as  
well as the contents of the error messages and remedies.  
7
7.1 Display Unit  
The Display Unit will, if it is turned on, perform a self-check.  
7.1.1 Display check  
• If the power is on, display check mode is entered.  
All LEDs and display sections turn on and then turn off. Then digit 8 turns on succes-  
sively [888···8] from the upper display section: during which check the display elements if  
they are normal and uniform in intensity.  
• Internal circuit checking is carried out and if found to be normal, LD1 ON LED turns on  
(LD1 ON and LD2 ON LEDs turn on if performing dual-unit measurement). Then the  
BUSY LED starts flashing and measurement will start from the ready state.  
• Error message will be displayed if abnormality is detected during selfcheck of the internal  
circuit. For details of error message, refer to 7.3, “Error Messages and Remedies”.  
7.1.2 Cleaning method  
If the Display Unit is contaminated, unplug the power cord from the inlet first, then wipe  
lightly with a soft dry cloth for the operator’s safety.  
No. 99MBC095A  
7 - 1  
7.2 Error Messages and Remedies  
The table below lists the error messages and their remedies.  
Display  
Meaning  
Remedies  
Segment error  
• Check if a workpiece is present.  
• There is no measuring object that  
corresponds to the specified segment.  
• Shutter is closed.  
• Laser does not come into reception unit.  
• Laser characteristic may be deteriorated.  
• Check the segment settings.  
• Make sure that the connection cable is connected  
between the Emission Unit and Reception Unit.  
• Open the shutter.  
• Be sure to align the optical axis correctly, if the Emission  
Unit and Reception Unit are separated from the mount.  
For details, refer to the measuring unit user’s manual.  
• Check the LD ON LED.  
Setup item error  
• There is a certain conflict in the setup data.  
C
• Press the  
key to clear the error message.  
• Previously setup contents are lost. Redo setup from the  
beginning.  
Calibration error  
• Incorrect segment setting  
C
• Press the  
key to clear the error message.  
• A value significantly different from the dimension of  
the reference gage is entered.  
• The HIGH CAL setting value is too close to  
the LOW CAL setting value.  
• Redo the segment setting again.  
• Cancel the setting value, then set it again.  
For information about the cancellation procedure,  
refer to Section 4.1, "Calibration".  
Setup value error:  
C
• Clear the error message by pressing the  
key.  
• The upper limit value is set lower than the lower  
limit value, or HIGH CAL ≤ LOW CAL.  
• Input the unacceptable value.  
• Clear the wrong setup values and re-enter the correct  
values.  
Inconsistent ID unit serial data  
• Serial numbers are not consistent between the ID unit  
and Measuring Unit.  
• The ID unit has a unique number for each Measuring  
Unit. Always mount the ID unit that has the same serial  
number as the Measuring Unit to be used.  
• Turn off the power and mount a correct ID unit.  
• Signal cable is not connected.  
• Incorrect measuring unit is connected.  
• Turn the off power and connect the signal cable.  
• Connect the Display Unit to the appropriate Measuring  
Unit.  
Laser does not scan.  
• Turn off the power and connect the signal cable.  
• Insert the short-circuiting pin.  
• Contact the nearest dealer or Mitutoyo sales  
representative.  
• Signal cable is not connected.  
• Short-circuiting pin is not inserted in the remote  
interlock connector.  
• Laser diode is deteriorated.  
• Scanner motor is not running.  
Laser diode anomaly  
(LD ON LED is flashing.)  
• The laser diode is forced to operate below  
a temperature outside the specified range.  
• Laser diode begins to deteriorate.  
• Using the laser diode at a high temperature reduces  
efficiency and accelerates deterioration in addition to  
drawing a large current. Take appropriate measures to  
cool the diode.  
• Contact the nearest dealer or Mitutoyo sales  
representative.  
LD 1 ON LD 2 ON  
• The dummy ID unit is installed.  
• Internal circuit error.  
• Replace the dummy ID unit with the ID unit supplied  
with the measuring unit.  
• Contact the nearest dealer or Mitutoyo sales  
representative.  
Printer error  
• Check the cable connection.  
• Cable is not connected or broken.  
• Communication conditions are not consistent.  
Setup value error:  
• Check the cable connection.  
• Cable is not connected or broken.  
¥ When the printer is not used, set to  
¥ setup.  
in the basic  
key.  
Stained protection glass has been detected.  
(In the case where the stained protection glass detection  
function has been set.)  
• Clear the message by pressing the  
C
• Clean the protection glass, referring to the measuring unit  
¥ user’s manual.  
Abnormal power supply  
• Turn on the power again.  
• Low line voltage  
• If this indication is repeated, check the line voltage for  
any abnormality such as a level drop and/or interference  
noise.  
•
Power supply is adversely affected by a surge current, etc.  
7 - 2  
No. 99MBC095A  
7. INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE  
7.3 Troubleshooting and Remedies  
The following table shows the troubleshooting and remedies on the LSM system.  
Symptoms  
Possible causes  
Remedies  
The LSM does not start  
if the power is turned on.  
• Extra power supply (+24V) is off or  
failed.  
• Check the external power supply.  
• Extra power supply cable is not  
connected.  
• Check the external power supply cable.  
Measurements are  
unstable, resulting in a  
poor accuracy.  
• Warm-up of the system is insufficient.  
• Warm up the system at least 20 to 30  
minutes.  
• Measuring Unit is directly subjected to • Take measures to avoid the system  
sunlight or air flow from the air  
conditioner.  
from being subjected those troubles.  
• Contaminated protection glass.  
• Clean the glass by referring to Section  
8.2. “Measuring Unit”  
• Vibration of workpiece.  
• Laser diode power is reduced.  
• Set a larger number of scans.  
• Check the LD ON LED is flashing.  
If it does, contact Mitutoyo or the  
nearest sales representative.  
Measuring error persists  
even after calibration  
• Contaminated protection glass.  
• Clean the glass by referring to the  
measuring unit user's manual.  
Statistical processing  
can not be achieved.  
• Single-run measurement,  
continuous-run measurement,  
or zero-run measurement has not been  
performed.  
• Perform the single-run measurement,  
continuous-run measurement,  
or zero-run measurement.  
• “ST” command is not sent through  
RS-232C.  
• Send the “ST” command.  
The system incorrectly  
operates.  
• The system is electrically interfered.  
• Make a positive grounding, and use a  
shielded-wire cable for the I/O analog  
interface. Lay this cable sufficiently  
away from the source of interference.  
• The external power supply should be  
drawn from a line with little electrical  
interference.  
Measurement does not  
terminate while  
is  
• The number of samples in the sample  
measurement it too large.  
C
• Stop the measurement with the  
key and set a smaller number of  
samples.  
• Check the setup value  
displayed.  
• Under the use of abnormal value  
eliminating function the workpiece  
dimension is significantly different  
from the setup value.  
Measurement interval  
does not match the  
measuring conditions.  
• Under the use of the abnormal value  
eliminating function the workpiece  
dimension is significantly different  
from the setup value.  
• Check the setup value.  
No. 99MBC095A  
7 - 3  
7.4 Fuse replacement  
• Before replacing a fuse, turn the power switch to OFF and unplug the power cord from the  
inlet for safety.  
• Always use fuses that have the specified rating.  
• Refer to the following diagram for the replacement procedure.  
The groove on the head  
of the fuse holder  
Screwdriver  
To replace a fuse, insert a  
screwdriver blade into the  
groove on the head of the fuse  
holder, turn the screwdriver  
counterclockwise as shown  
by the arrow, then remove the  
fuse holder cover.  
7 - 4  
No. 99MBC095A  
SPECIFICATIONS  
8
This chapter describes the specifications and supplied accessories of the  
LSM-6200 Display Unit.  
8.1 LSM-6200 Display Unit  
(1) Specifications  
Code No.  
mm/E  
544-071  
544-072  
mm/inch  
Model No.  
LSM-6200  
Fluorescent display 16-digit + 11-digit, Guidance LEDs  
Display  
Measuring functions  
Segment designation  
Edge designation  
1 to 7 (1 to 3 for Transparent)  
1 to 255  
Arithmetical averaging  
Moving averaging  
8 to 2048  
32 to 2048  
Averaging method  
Tolerance judgment (GO, ±NG) ; Multi-limit judgment (7classes) ;  
Preset/Zero-set ; Mastering ; Abnormal data elimination ;  
Automatic workpiece detection ; Reference value setting ;  
Data output condition ; Laser power deterioration ; Sample measurement ;  
Statistical processing ; Dual-program measurement ;  
Automatic measurement using edge mode ; Workpiece position display ;  
Transparent object measuring (Segment : 1 to 3); Key-lock function ;  
mm / inch changeover ; Dual-gauge calibration ; Selection of resolution ;  
Display of a comma to mark the thousandths position ;  
Judgment in ready state ; None-display unnecessary digits ;  
Distinction of measurement part model ; Buzzer ;  
Tolerance judgment (GO, ±NG) in a standby state +Analog output ;  
Group judgment ; Fine wire measurement (only LSM-500S);  
Dual-Measurement (Two measurement part connection)(Option);  
Drill / End mill (Odd number edge) outer-diameter measurement;  
The number of programs:100;  
Scanning signal monitor  
connector  
Provided as standard (with the plug)  
Remote interlock connector  
Provided as standard (with the plug)  
Key switch used  
Power switch  
Built-in interface  
Optional interface  
RS-232C ; Foot switch connector ; I/O analog interface  
DCU slot  
Digimatic code output unit (2-ch)  
Option slot (1-slot)  
2nd I/O analog I / F ; BCD I / F ; GP-IB I / F ;  
Power supply  
AC100V to 240V±10%, 50 / 60Hz, 50W  
Operating environmental  
Temperature  
0°C to 40 °C  
Humidity  
Altitude  
35%RH to 85 %RH [without condensation]  
2000m or less  
Storage environmental  
Temperature  
Humidity  
-15°C to 55°C  
35%RH to 85 %RH [without condensation]  
Approx. 5kg  
Mass  
Safety  
Compliance with EN61010-1  
(OVER VOLTAGE CATEGORY II, POLLUTION DEGREE2)  
No. 99MBC095A  
8 - 1  
(2) Standard Accessories  
Part No.  
—
Item  
Qt.  
1
Power cord [Note]  
GND lead wire  
02ADC020  
956042  
1
Short-circuiting pin for remote interlock connector (delivered as mounted on the display unit)  
1
214938  
Remote interlock connector (MP-121M:MARUSHIN)  
Scan signal monitoring connector (MP-105LC:MARUSHIN)  
Fuse 2A (Time lag)  
1
02AGC401  
C124-057  
02AGC604  
99MBC095A  
1
1
Power key switch  
2
User's Manual  
1
Note: Depending on delivered country.  
(3) Optional Accessories  
Part No.  
02AGP150  
02AGC840  
02AGC880  
02AGC910  
02AGC940  
02AGD600A  
02AGD600B  
02AGD600C  
223663  
Item  
Dual-type add-on unit for LSM-6200  
Digimatic Output Unit Interface (with two channels)  
Second Analog I/O Interface  
BCD Interface  
GP-IB Interface  
Printer & cable set: DPU-414-30B + PW-4007-J1 (100 VAC, for domestic use)  
Printer & cable set: DPU-414-30B + PW-4007-U1 (120 VAC, for U.S.A.)  
Printer & cable set: DPU-414-30B + PW-4007-E1 (230 VAC, for Europe)  
Printer paper (10 rolls)  
936937  
Digimatic Output Unit cable  
937179T  
Foot switch  
8 - 2  
No. 99MBC095A  
8. SPECIFICATIONS  
(4) External view and dimensions  
No. 99MBC095A  
8 - 3  
MEMO  
8 - 4  
No. 99MBC095A  
RESTRICTIONS  
ASSOCIATED WITH THE  
COMBINATION OF  
FUNCTIONS, TABLES OF  
THE BASIC SETUP  
MODES  
9
This chapter describes the restrictions associated with the particular  
combination of functions. It also describes the setup modes using tables.  
9.1 Restrictions Associated with the Particular Combination  
of Functions  
The following restrictions exist for function combinations.  
1. Restrictions on the combination of functions for single-unit measurement and single  
measurement are as follows.  
Functions  
combinations  
Edge specification  
Manual Automatic  
measure- measure-  
ment ment  
Trans-  
parent  
object  
measure-  
ment  
Ultra-fine Automatic Abnormal Sample  
wire mea- workpiece value measure- numbered-  
surement detection elimination ment  
Odd-  
Moving  
average judgment  
Group  
edge cutting  
tool measure-  
ment  
Edge  
specif-  
ication  
Manual  
measure-  
ment  
Automatic  
measure-  
ment  
Transparent object  
measurement  
Ultra-fine wire  
measurement  
Automatic workpiece  
detection  
Abnormal value  
elimination  
Sample measurement  
Odd-numbered-edge cutting  
tool measurement  
Moving average  
Group judgment  
No. 99MBC095A  
9 - 1  
2. The following restrictions are applied to the combination of functions depending on the  
number of Measuring Units to be used.  
Single measurement  
2 units  
Simultaneous measurement  
2 units  
Number of Measuring Units  
Type of dual-unit layout  
1 unit  
1 unit  
DW  
DXY  
DF  
DW  
DXY  
DF  
Manual  
measurement  
Edge specification  
Automatic  
measurement  
Transparent object measurement  
Ultra-fine wire measurement  
Automatic workpiece detection  
Abnormal value elimination  
Sample measurement  
Odd-numbered-edge cutting tool measurement  
Moving average  
Group judgment  
9.2 List of Setup Modes  
Tables in the following are the list of setup modes. Use these tables to check the setup data.  
1. Make a check in the squares at the left of the mode number or in the setting content  
column that need to be setup.  
2. Fill in the setup values for the underlined part.  
3. If these setup values are frequently changed, make copies of these forms.  
9 - 2  
No. 99MBC095A  
9. RESTRICTIONS ASSOCIATED WITH THE COMBINATION OF FUNCTIONS,  
TABLES OF THE BASIC SETUP MODES  
9.2.1 List of basic setup modes  
[Basic setup mode]  
Mode  
No.  
Setup item  
Guidance  
Setup contents  
Default setup  
No. 99MBC095A  
9 - 3  
Mode  
No.  
Setup item  
Guidance  
Setup contents  
Default setup  
B4  
B5  
B6  
[Expanded basic setup mode]  
Mode  
No.  
Setup item  
General items  
Guidance  
Setup contents  
Default setup  
B0 to B6  
B7  
9 - 4  
No. 99MBC095A  
9. RESTRICTIONS ASSOCIATED WITH THE COMBINATION OF FUNCTIONS,  
TABLES OF THE BASIC SETUP MODES  
9.2.2 List of calibration functions  
Setup contents  
Setup item  
Setup range  
Default setup  
Item  
9.2.3 Reading in the amount of light  
Setup contents  
Item  
Setup range  
Default setup  
Light amount detection  
: Automatically performs light amount detection.  
: Reading in the light amount.  
No. 99MBC095A  
9 - 5  
9.2.4 List of function setup modes  
Program No. =  
Mode  
No.  
Setup item  
Guidance  
Setup contents  
Setup range  
Default setting  
F0  
(
(
(
(
to  
to  
to  
to  
)
)
)
)
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
F5  
F6  
F7  
F8  
9 - 6  
No. 99MBC095A  
Mitutoyo Corporation  
20-1, Sakado 1-chome, Takatsu-ku, Kawasaki, Kanagawa 213-8533, Japan  
Phone: 81(44)813-8230 Fax: 81(44)813-8231  
URL: http://www.mitutoyo.co.jp  
Printed in Japan  

RCA Small Wonder EZ202 User Manual
Profoto Pro 8a Generator PRO 8A 1200 AIR User Manual
Panasonic Blu ray Player BDP 440 User Manual
Nortel Networks INTUITION 1000 User Manual
Nikon SB 400 User Manual
Land Pride Car Video System 4220ST User Manual
KitchenAid KUWS246EBT01 User Manual
Kenwood KVT 522DVD User Manual
Kenwood DNX6040EX User Manual
Kenwood DIGITAL AUDIO KDC PS9070R User Manual